Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/reftex.texi @ 61996:18c0da616450
(define-function, sref): Remove aliases and obsolete
declarations.
(chars-in-region): Remove obsolete declaration.
author | Nick Roberts <nickrob@snap.net.nz> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 01 May 2005 22:18:14 +0000 |
parents | bae786986f2e |
children | e454fb80ab88 4da4a09e8b1b |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25829 | 1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- |
2 @c %**start of header | |
59538
87ebb131f763
corrected setfilename
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59536
diff
changeset
|
3 @setfilename ../info/reftex |
25829 | 4 @settitle RefTeX User Manual |
5 @synindex ky cp | |
6 @syncodeindex vr cp | |
7 @syncodeindex fn cp | |
59536 | 8 |
9 @c Version and Contact Info | |
10 @set VERSION 4.24 | |
11 @set EDITION 4.24 | |
60919
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
12 @set DATE March 2005 |
59536 | 13 @set AUCTEXSITE @uref{http://www.nongnu.org/auctex/,AUCTeX distribution site} |
14 @set MAINTAINERSITE @uref{http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools/,maintainers webpage} | |
15 @set MAINTAINER Carsten Dominik | |
16 @set MAINTAINEREMAIL @email{dominik@@science.uva.nl} | |
17 @set MAINTAINERCONTACT @uref{mailto:dominik@@science.uva.nl,contact the maintainer} | |
18 @set XEMACSFTP @uref{ftp://ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/packages/,XEmacs ftp site}. | |
25829 | 19 @c %**end of header |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
20 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
21 @copying |
25829 | 22 This file documents @b{Ref@TeX{}}, a package to do labels, references, |
47737
0a70200bde27
use @copying instead of @ifinfo.
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
47050
diff
changeset
|
23 citations and indices for LaTeX documents with Emacs. |
25829 | 24 |
25 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} User Manual for | |
59536 | 26 @b{Ref@TeX{}} @value{VERSION} |
25829 | 27 |
60919
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
28 Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2005 |
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
29 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 30 |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
31 @quotation |
37404
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
32 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
33 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
34 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
35 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
36 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
37 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
38 License'' in the Emacs manual. |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
39 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
40 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
41 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
42 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
43 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
44 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
45 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
46 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
47 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
48 @end quotation |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
49 @end copying |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
50 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
51 @dircategory Emacs |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
52 @direntry |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
53 * RefTeX: (reftex). Emacs support for LaTeX cross-references and citations. |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
54 @end direntry |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
55 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
56 @finalout |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
57 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
58 @c Macro definitions |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
59 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
60 @c Subheadings inside a table. Need a difference between info and the rest. |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
61 @macro tablesubheading{text} |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
62 @ifinfo |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
63 @subsubheading \text\ |
25829 | 64 @end ifinfo |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
65 @ifnotinfo |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
66 @item @b{\text\} |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
67 @end ifnotinfo |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
68 @end macro |
25829 | 69 |
70 @titlepage | |
71 @title Ref@TeX{} User Manual | |
72 @subtitle Support for LaTeX labels, references, citations and index entries with GNU Emacs | |
73 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE} | |
74 | |
75 @author by Carsten Dominik | |
76 @page | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
77 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
78 @insertcopying |
25829 | 79 @end titlepage |
80 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
81 @ifnottex |
25829 | 82 @node Top,,,(dir) |
83 | |
84 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a package for managing Labels, References, | |
59536 | 85 Citations and index entries with GNU Emacs. |
25829 | 86 |
87 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers | |
88 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in great depth. All you need to know to use | |
89 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a | |
90 Nutshell}). You can go back later to other parts of this document when | |
59536 | 91 needed. |
25829 | 92 |
93 @menu | |
94 * Introduction:: Quick-Start information. | |
95 | |
96 * Table of Contents:: A Tool to move around quickly. | |
97 * Labels and References:: Creating and referencing labels. | |
98 * Citations:: Creating Citations. | |
99 * Index Support:: Creating and Checking Index Entries. | |
100 * Viewing Cross-References:: Who references or cites what? | |
101 | |
102 * RefTeXs Menu:: The Ref menu in the menubar. | |
39267 | 103 * Key Bindings:: The default key bindings. |
25829 | 104 * Faces:: Fontification of RefTeX's buffers. |
105 * Multifile Documents:: Document spread over many files. | |
106 * Language Support:: How to support other languages. | |
107 * Finding Files:: Included TeX files and BibTeX .bib files. | |
108 * AUCTeX:: Cooperation with AUCTeX. | |
109 * Optimizations:: When RefTeX is too slow. | |
110 * Problems and Work-Arounds:: First Aid. | |
111 * Imprint:: Author, Web-site, Thanks | |
112 | |
113 * Commands:: Which are the available commands. | |
114 * Options:: How to extend and configure RefTeX. | |
115 * Keymaps and Hooks:: For customization. | |
116 * Changes:: A List of recent changes to RefTeX. | |
117 | |
118 The Index | |
119 | |
120 * Index:: The full index. | |
121 | |
122 @detailmenu | |
123 | |
124 Introduction | |
125 | |
126 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
127 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
128 |
25829 | 129 Labels and References |
130 | |
131 * Creating Labels:: | |
132 * Referencing Labels:: | |
133 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
134 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
135 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
136 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
137 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
138 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
139 | |
140 Defining Label Environments | |
141 | |
142 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
143 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
144 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
145 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
146 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
147 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
148 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
149 | |
150 Citations | |
151 | |
152 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
153 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
154 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
155 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
156 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
59536 | 157 * BibTeX Database Subsets:: Extract parts of a big database. |
25829 | 158 |
159 Index Support | |
160 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
161 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
162 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
163 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 164 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
165 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
166 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
167 The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
168 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
169 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
170 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
171 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
172 |
25829 | 173 AUCTeX |
174 | |
175 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
176 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
177 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
178 | |
179 Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
180 | |
181 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
182 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
183 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
184 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
185 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
186 * Options (Index Support):: | |
187 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
188 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
189 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
190 * Options (Fontification):: | |
191 * Options (Misc):: | |
192 | |
193 @end detailmenu | |
194 @end menu | |
195 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
196 @end ifnottex |
25829 | 197 |
198 @node Introduction, Table of Contents, , Top | |
199 @chapter Introduction | |
200 @cindex Introduction | |
201 | |
202 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a specialized package for support of labels, | |
203 references, citations, and the index in LaTeX. @b{Ref@TeX{}} wraps | |
204 itself round 4 LaTeX macros: @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, | |
205 and @code{\index}. Using these macros usually requires looking up | |
206 different parts of the document and searching through BibTeX database | |
207 files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} automates these time--consuming tasks almost | |
208 entirely. It also provides functions to display the structure of a | |
59536 | 209 document and to move around in this structure quickly. |
25829 | 210 |
211 @iftex | |
212 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
213 in great depth. All you need to know to use @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be | |
214 summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a Nutshell}). You can go | |
215 back later to other parts of this document when needed. | |
216 @end iftex | |
217 | |
218 @xref{Imprint}, for information about who to contact for help, bug | |
219 reports or suggestions. | |
220 | |
221 @menu | |
222 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
223 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
224 @end menu | |
225 | |
226 @node Installation, RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Introduction | |
227 @section Installation | |
228 @cindex Installation | |
229 | |
59536 | 230 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre--installed with Emacs since version |
231 20.2. It was also bundled and pre--installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. | |
232 XEmacs 21.x users want to install the corresponding plug-in package | |
233 which is available from the @value{XEMACSFTP}. See the XEmacs 21.x | |
234 documentation on package installation for details. | |
25829 | 235 |
236 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a copy | |
237 of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the maintainers web-page. | |
59536 | 238 @xref{Imprint}, for more information. |
25829 | 239 |
240 @section Environment | |
241 @cindex Finding files | |
242 @cindex BibTeX database files, not found | |
243 @cindex TeX files, not found | |
244 @cindex @code{TEXINPUTS}, environment variable | |
245 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
246 | |
247 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile | |
248 document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the | |
249 @code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
250 require a search path, i.e. a list of directories to check. Normally | |
251 this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and | |
252 @code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. However, on some | |
253 systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If | |
254 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not work for you because it cannot find some files, | |
255 read @ref{Finding Files}. | |
256 | |
257 @section Entering @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode | |
258 | |
259 @findex turn-on-reftex | |
260 @findex reftex-mode | |
261 @vindex LaTeX-mode-hook | |
262 @vindex latex-mode-hook | |
263 To turn @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode on and off in a particular buffer, use | |
264 @kbd{M-x reftex-mode}. To turn on @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode for all LaTeX | |
59536 | 265 files, add the following lines to your @file{.emacs} file: |
25829 | 266 |
267 @example | |
268 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with AUCTeX LaTeX mode | |
269 (add-hook 'latex-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with Emacs latex mode | |
270 @end example | |
271 | |
272 @page | |
273 @node RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Installation, Introduction | |
274 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}} in a Nutshell | |
275 @cindex Quick-Start | |
276 @cindex Getting Started | |
277 @cindex RefTeX in a Nutshell | |
278 @cindex Nutshell, RefTeX in a | |
279 | |
280 @enumerate | |
281 @item | |
282 @b{Table of Contents}@* Typing @kbd{C-c =} (@code{reftex-toc}) will show | |
283 a table of contents of the document. This buffer can display sections, | |
284 labels and index entries defined in the document. From the buffer, you | |
285 can jump quickly to every part of your document. Press @kbd{?} to get | |
59536 | 286 help. |
25829 | 287 |
288 @item | |
289 @b{Labels and References}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to create unique labels | |
290 and to find the correct key for references quickly. It distinguishes | |
291 labels for different environments, knows about all standard | |
292 environments (and many others), and can be configured to recognize any | |
293 additional labeled environments you have defined yourself (variable | |
59536 | 294 @code{reftex-label-alist}). |
25829 | 295 |
296 @itemize @bullet | |
297 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
298 @b{Creating Labels}@* |
25829 | 299 Type @kbd{C-c (} (@code{reftex-label}) to insert a label at point. |
300 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will either | |
301 @itemize @minus | |
302 @item | |
303 derive a label from context (default for section labels) | |
304 @item | |
305 prompt for a label string (default for figures and tables) or | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
306 @item |
25829 | 307 insert a simple label made of a prefix and a number (all other |
59536 | 308 environments) |
25829 | 309 @end itemize |
310 @noindent | |
311 Which labels are created how is configurable with the variable | |
59536 | 312 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags}. |
25829 | 313 |
314 @item | |
315 @b{Referencing Labels}@* To make a reference, type @kbd{C-c )} | |
316 (@code{reftex-reference}). This shows an outline of the document with | |
317 all labels of a certain type (figure, equation,...) and some label | |
318 context. Selecting a label inserts a @code{\ref@{@var{label}@}} macro | |
59536 | 319 into the original buffer. |
25829 | 320 @end itemize |
321 | |
322 @item | |
323 @b{Citations}@* | |
324 Typing @kbd{C-c [} (@code{reftex-citation}) will let you specify a | |
325 regular expression to search in current BibTeX database files (as | |
326 specified in the @code{\bibliography} command) and pull out a list of | |
327 matches for you to choose from. The list is @emph{formatted} and | |
328 sorted. The selected article is referenced as @samp{\cite@{@var{key}@}} | |
329 (see the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} if you want to insert | |
59536 | 330 different macros). |
25829 | 331 |
332 @item | |
333 @b{Index Support}@* | |
334 @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to enter index entries. It also compiles all | |
335 entries into an alphabetically sorted @file{*Index*} buffer which you | |
336 can use to check and edit the entries. @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about the | |
337 standard index macros and can be configured to recognize any additional | |
338 macros you have defined (@code{reftex-index-macros}). Multiple indices | |
59536 | 339 are supported. |
25829 | 340 |
341 @itemize @bullet | |
342 @item | |
343 @b{Creating Index Entries}@* | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
344 To index the current selection or the word at point, type @kbd{C-c /} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
345 (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). The default macro |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
346 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} will be used. For a more complex entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
347 type @kbd{C-c <} (@code{reftex-index}), select any of the index macros |
59536 | 348 and enter the arguments with completion. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
349 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
350 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
351 @b{The Index Phrases File (Delayed Indexing)}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
352 Type @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) to add |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
353 the current word or selection to a special @emph{index phrase file}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
354 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can later search the document for occurrences of these |
59536 | 355 phrases and let you interactively index the matches. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
356 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
357 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
358 @b{Displaying and Editing the Index}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
359 To display the compiled index in a special buffer, type @kbd{C-c >} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
360 (@code{reftex-display-index}). From that buffer you can check and edit |
59536 | 361 all entries. |
25829 | 362 @end itemize |
363 | |
364 @page | |
365 @item @b{Viewing Cross-References}@* | |
366 When point is on the @var{key} argument of a cross--referencing macro | |
367 (@code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, | |
368 @code{\index}, and variations) or inside a BibTeX database entry, you | |
369 can press @kbd{C-c &} (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) to display | |
370 corresponding locations in the document and associated BibTeX database | |
59536 | 371 files. @* |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
372 When the enclosing macro is @code{\cite} or @code{\ref} and no other |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
373 message occupies the echo area, information about the citation or label |
59536 | 374 will automatically be displayed in the echo area. |
25829 | 375 |
376 @item | |
377 @b{Multifile Documents}@* | |
378 Multifile Documents are fully supported. The included files must have a | |
379 file variable @code{TeX-master} or @code{tex-main-file} pointing to the | |
380 master file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides cross-referencing information from | |
381 all parts of the document, and across document borders | |
59536 | 382 (@file{xr.sty}). |
25829 | 383 |
384 @item | |
385 @b{Document Parsing}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to parse the document in | |
386 order to find labels and other information. It does it automatically | |
387 once and updates its list internally when @code{reftex-label} and | |
388 @code{reftex-index} are used. To enforce reparsing, call any of the | |
389 commands described above with a raw @kbd{C-u} prefix, or press the | |
390 @kbd{r} key in the label selection buffer, the table of contents | |
59536 | 391 buffer, or the index buffer. |
25829 | 392 |
393 @item | |
394 @b{AUCTeX} @* If your major LaTeX mode is AUCTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can | |
395 cooperate with it (see variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX}). AUCTeX | |
396 contains style files which trigger appropriate settings in | |
397 @b{Ref@TeX{}}, so that for many of the popular LaTeX packages no | |
59536 | 398 additional customizations will be necessary. |
25829 | 399 |
400 @item | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
401 @b{Useful Settings}@* |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
402 To integrate RefTeX with AUCTeX, use |
25829 | 403 @lisp |
404 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
405 @end lisp | |
406 | |
407 To make your own LaTeX macro definitions known to @b{Ref@TeX{}}, | |
59536 | 408 customize the variables |
25829 | 409 @example |
410 @code{reftex-label-alist} @r{(for label macros/environments)} | |
411 @code{reftex-section-levels} @r{(for sectioning commands)} | |
412 @code{reftex-cite-format} @r{(for @code{\cite}-like macros)} | |
413 @code{reftex-index-macros} @r{(for @code{\index}-like macros)} | |
414 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} @r{(to set the default macro)} | |
415 @end example | |
416 If you have a large number of macros defined, you may want to write | |
417 an AUCTeX style file to support them with both AUCTeX and | |
59536 | 418 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. |
25829 | 419 |
420 @item @b{Where Next?}@* Go ahead and use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Use its menus | |
421 until you have picked up the key bindings. For an overview of what you | |
422 can do in each of the different special buffers, press @kbd{?}. Read | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
423 the manual if you get stuck, of if you are curious what else might be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
424 available. The first part of the manual explains in |
25829 | 425 a tutorial way how to use and customize @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The second |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
426 part is a command and variable reference. |
25829 | 427 @end enumerate |
428 | |
429 @node Table of Contents, Labels and References, Introduction, Top | |
430 @chapter Table of Contents | |
431 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer | |
59536 | 432 @cindex Structure editing |
25829 | 433 @cindex Table of contents buffer |
434 @findex reftex-toc | |
435 @kindex C-c = | |
436 | |
437 Pressing the keys @kbd{C-c =} pops up a buffer showing the table of | |
438 contents of the document. By default, this @file{*toc*} buffer shows | |
439 only the sections of a document. Using the @kbd{l} and @kbd{i} keys you | |
440 can display all labels and index entries defined in the document as | |
59536 | 441 well. |
25829 | 442 |
443 With the cursor in any of the lines denoting a location in the | |
444 document, simple key strokes will display the corresponding part in | |
59536 | 445 another window, jump to that location, or perform other actions. |
25829 | 446 |
447 @kindex ? | |
448 Here is a list of special commands in the @file{*toc*} buffer. A | |
449 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
59536 | 450 @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 451 |
452 @table @kbd | |
453 | |
454 @tablesubheading{General} | |
455 @item ? | |
456 Display a summary of commands. | |
457 | |
458 @item 0-9, - | |
459 Prefix argument. | |
460 | |
461 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
462 @item n | |
463 Goto next entry in the table of context. | |
464 | |
465 @item p | |
466 Goto previous entry in the table of context. | |
467 | |
468 @item C-c C-n | |
469 Goto next section heading. Useful when many labels and index entries | |
59536 | 470 separate section headings. |
25829 | 471 |
472 @item C-c C-p | |
473 Goto previous section heading. | |
474 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
475 @item N z |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
476 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example, @kbd{3 z} jumps |
59536 | 477 to section 3. |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
478 |
25829 | 479 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} |
480 @item @key{SPC} | |
481 Show the corresponding location in another window. This command does | |
59536 | 482 @emph{not} select that other window. |
25829 | 483 |
484 @item @key{TAB} | |
485 Goto the location in another window. | |
486 | |
487 @item @key{RET} | |
488 Go to the location and hide the @file{*toc*} buffer. This will restore | |
489 the window configuration before @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-c =}) was | |
59536 | 490 called. |
25829 | 491 |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
492 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 493 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
494 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a line has the same effect as @key{RET}. | |
495 See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
59536 | 496 (Fontification)}. |
25829 | 497 |
498 @item f | |
499 @vindex reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
500 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
501 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
502 always show the location corresponding to the line at point in the | |
503 @file{*toc*} buffer. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
504 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
505 @code{reftex-toc-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files already | |
506 visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for follow | |
507 mode. See, however, the variable | |
59536 | 508 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. |
25829 | 509 |
510 @item . | |
511 Show calling point in another window. This is the point from where | |
512 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. | |
513 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
514 @page |
59536 | 515 @tablesubheading{Promotion and Demotion} |
516 | |
517 @item < | |
518 Promote the current section. This will convert @code{\section} to | |
519 @code{\chapter}, @code{\subsection} to @code{\section} etc. If there is | |
520 an active region, all sections in the region will be promoted, including | |
521 the one at point. To avoid mistakes, @b{Ref@TeX{}} requires a fresh | |
522 document scan before executing this command - if necessary, it will | |
523 automatically do this scan and ask the user to repeat the promotion | |
524 command. | |
525 | |
526 @item > | |
527 Demote the current section. This is the opposite of promotion. It will | |
528 convert @code{\chapter} to @code{\section} etc. If there is an active | |
529 region, all sections in the region will be demoted, including the one at | |
530 point. | |
531 | |
532 @item M-% | |
533 Rename the label at point. While generally not recommended, this can be | |
534 useful when a package like @file{fancyref} is used where the label | |
535 prefix determines the wording of a reference. After a | |
536 promotion/demotion it may be necessary to change a few labels from | |
537 @samp{sec:xyz} to @samp{cha:xyz} or vice versa. This command can be | |
538 used to do this - it launches a query replace to rename the definition | |
539 and all references of a label. | |
540 | |
25829 | 541 @tablesubheading{Exiting} |
542 @item q | |
543 Hide the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
59536 | 544 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. |
25829 | 545 |
546 @item k | |
547 Kill the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
59536 | 548 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. |
25829 | 549 |
550 @item C-c > | |
551 Switch to the @file{*Index*} buffer of this document. With prefix | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
552 @samp{2}, restrict the index to the section at point in the @file{*toc*} |
25829 | 553 buffer. |
554 | |
555 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
556 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
557 @item t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
558 @vindex reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
559 Change the maximum level of toc entries displayed in the @file{*toc*} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
560 buffer. Without prefix arg, all levels will be included. With prefix |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
561 arg (e.g @kbd{3 t}), ignore all toc entries with level greater than |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
562 @var{arg} (3 in this case). Chapters are level 1, sections are level 2. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
563 The mode line @samp{T<>} indicator shows the current value. The default |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
564 depth can be configured with the variable |
59536 | 565 @code{reftex-toc-max-level}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
566 |
25829 | 567 @item F |
568 @vindex reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
569 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
570 @file{*toc*} buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the | |
59536 | 571 variable @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. |
25829 | 572 |
573 @item l | |
574 @vindex reftex-toc-include-labels | |
575 Toggle the display of labels in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The default | |
576 for this flag can be set with the variable | |
577 @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}. When called with a prefix argument, | |
578 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a label type and include only labels of | |
579 the selected type in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode line @samp{L<>} | |
59536 | 580 indicator shows which labels are included. |
25829 | 581 |
582 @item i | |
583 @vindex reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
584 Toggle the display of index entries in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The | |
585 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
586 @code{reftex-toc-include-index-entries}. When called with a prefix | |
587 argument, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a specific index and include | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
588 only entries in the selected index in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode |
59536 | 589 line @samp{I<>} indicator shows which index is used. |
25829 | 590 |
591 @item c | |
592 @vindex reftex-toc-include-context | |
593 Toggle the display of label and index context in the @file{*toc*} | |
594 buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
59536 | 595 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}. |
25829 | 596 |
597 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
598 | |
599 @item g | |
600 Rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
59536 | 601 document. |
25829 | 602 |
603 @item r | |
604 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
605 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. When | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
606 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-@code{nil}, rescan only the file this |
59536 | 607 location is defined in, not the entire document. |
25829 | 608 |
609 @item C-u r | |
610 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} | |
59536 | 611 buffer. |
25829 | 612 |
613 @item x | |
614 Switch to the @file{*toc*} buffer of an external document. When the | |
615 current document is using the @code{xr} package (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
616 package)}), @b{Ref@TeX{}} will switch to one of the external | |
59536 | 617 documents. |
618 | |
619 | |
620 @tablesubheading{Automatic recentering} | |
621 | |
622 @item d | |
623 Toggle the display of a dedicated frame displaying just the @file{*toc*} | |
624 buffer. Follow mode and visiting locations will not work that frame, | |
625 but automatic recentering will make this frame always show your current | |
626 editing location in the document (see below). | |
25829 | 627 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
628 @item a |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
629 Toggle the automatic recentering of the @file{*toc*} buffer. When this |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
630 option is on, moving around in the document will cause the @file{*toc*} |
59536 | 631 to always highlight the current section. By default, this option is |
632 active while the dedicated @file{*TOC*} frame exists. See also the | |
633 variable @code{reftex-auto-recenter-toc}. | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
634 |
25829 | 635 @end table |
636 | |
637 @vindex reftex-toc-map | |
638 In order to define additional commands for the @file{*toc*} buffer, the | |
59536 | 639 keymap @code{reftex-toc-map} may be used. |
25829 | 640 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
641 @findex reftex-toc-recenter |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
642 @vindex reftex-auto-recenter-toc |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
643 @vindex reftex-idle-time |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
644 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer, recentering |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
645 @cindex Table of contents buffer, recentering |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
646 @kindex C-c - |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
647 If you call @code{reftex-toc} while the @file{*toc*} buffer already |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
648 exists, the cursor will immediately jump to the right place, i.e. the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
649 section from which @code{reftex-toc} was called will be highlighted. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
650 The command @kbd{C-c -} (@code{reftex-toc-recenter}) will only redisplay |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
651 the @file{*toc*} buffer and highlight the correct line without actually |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
652 selecting the @file{*toc*} window. This can be useful to quickly find |
59536 | 653 out where in the document you currently are. You can also automate this |
654 by asking RefTeX to keep track of your current editing position in the | |
655 TOC. The TOC window will then be updated whenever you stop typing for | |
656 more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. By default this works only | |
657 with the dedicated @file{*TOC*} frame. But you can also force automatic | |
658 recentering of the TOC window on the current frame with | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
659 @lisp |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
660 (setq reftex-auto-recenter-toc t) |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
661 @end lisp |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
662 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
663 |
25829 | 664 @cindex Sectioning commands |
665 @cindex KOMA-Script, LaTeX classes | |
666 @cindex LaTeX classes, KOMA-Script | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
667 @cindex TOC entries for environments |
25829 | 668 @vindex reftex-section-levels |
669 The section macros recognized by @b{Ref@TeX{}} are all LaTeX section | |
670 macros (from @code{\part} to @code{\subsubparagraph}) and the commands | |
671 @code{\addchap} and @code{\addsec} from the KOMA-Script classes. | |
672 Additional macros can be configured with the variable | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
673 @code{reftex-section-levels}. It is also possible to add certain LaTeX |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
674 environments to the table of contents. This is probably only useful for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
675 theorem-like environments. @xref{Defining Label Environments}, for an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
676 example. |
25829 | 677 |
678 @node Labels and References, Citations, Table of Contents, Top | |
679 @chapter Labels and References | |
680 @cindex Labels in LaTeX | |
681 @cindex References in LaTeX | |
682 @cindex Label category | |
683 @cindex Label environment | |
684 @cindex @code{\label} | |
685 | |
686 LaTeX provides a powerful mechanism to deal with cross--references in a | |
687 document. When writing a document, any part of it can be marked with a | |
688 label, like @samp{\label@{mark@}}. LaTeX records the current value of a | |
689 certain counter when a label is defined. Later references to this label | |
690 (like @samp{\ref@{mark@}}) will produce the recorded value of the | |
59536 | 691 counter. |
25829 | 692 |
693 Labels can be used to mark sections, figures, tables, equations, | |
694 footnotes, items in enumerate lists etc. LaTeX is context sensitive in | |
695 doing this: A label defined in a figure environment automatically | |
59536 | 696 records the figure counter, not the section counter. |
25829 | 697 |
698 Several different environments can share a common counter and therefore | |
699 a common label category. E.g. labels in both @code{equation} and | |
700 @code{eqnarray} environments record the value of the same counter - the | |
59536 | 701 equation counter. |
25829 | 702 |
703 @menu | |
704 * Creating Labels:: | |
705 * Referencing Labels:: | |
706 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
707 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
708 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
709 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
710 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
711 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
712 @end menu | |
713 | |
714 @node Creating Labels, Referencing Labels, , Labels and References | |
715 @section Creating Labels | |
716 @cindex Creating labels | |
717 @cindex Labels, creating | |
718 @cindex Labels, deriving from context | |
719 @kindex C-c ( | |
720 @findex reftex-label | |
721 | |
722 In order to create a label in a LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c (} | |
723 (@code{reftex-label}). Just like LaTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} is context sensitive | |
724 and will figure out the environment it currently is in and adapt the | |
725 label to that environment. A label usually consists of a short prefix | |
726 indicating the type of the label and a unique mark. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
59536 | 727 3 different modes to create this mark. |
25829 | 728 |
729 @enumerate | |
730 @item | |
731 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
732 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
733 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
734 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
735 A label can be derived from context. This means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} takes | |
736 the context of the label definition and constructs a label from | |
737 that@footnote{Note that the context may contain constructs which are | |
60919
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
738 invalid in labels. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will therefore strip the accent from |
25829 | 739 accented Latin-1 characters and remove everything else which is not |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
740 valid in labels. This mechanism is safe, but may not be satisfactory |
25829 | 741 for non-western languages. Check the following variables if you need to |
742 change things: @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
743 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}, @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}, | |
744 @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}.}. This works best for section labels, | |
745 where the section heading is used to construct a label. In fact, | |
746 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method only for section | |
747 labels. You will be asked to confirm the derived label, or edit | |
59536 | 748 it. |
25829 | 749 |
750 @item | |
751 We may also use a simple unique number to identify a label. This is | |
752 mostly useful for labels where it is difficult to come up with a very | |
753 good descriptive name. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method | |
754 for equations, enumerate items and footnotes. The author of @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
755 tends to write documents with many equations and finds it impossible | |
756 to come up with good names for each of them. These simple labels are | |
757 inserted without query, and are therefore very fast. Good descriptive | |
758 names are not really necessary as @b{Ref@TeX{}} will provide context to | |
59536 | 759 reference a label (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
25829 | 760 |
761 @item | |
762 The third method is to ask the user for a label. This is most | |
763 useful for things which are easy to describe briefly and do not turn up | |
764 too frequently in a document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses this for figures and | |
765 tables. Of course, one can enter the label directly by typing the full | |
766 @samp{\label@{mark@}}. The advantage of using @code{reftex-label} | |
767 anyway is that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that a new label has been defined. | |
768 It will then not be necessary to rescan the document in order to access | |
59536 | 769 this label later. |
25829 | 770 @end enumerate |
771 | |
772 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
773 If you want to change the way certain labels are created, check out the | |
774 variable @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating | |
59536 | 775 Labels)}). |
25829 | 776 |
777 If you are using AUCTeX to write your LaTeX documents, you can | |
778 set it up to delegate the creation of labels to | |
779 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @xref{AUCTeX}, for more information. | |
780 | |
781 @node Referencing Labels, Builtin Label Environments, Creating Labels, Labels and References | |
782 @section Referencing Labels | |
783 @cindex Referencing labels | |
784 @cindex Labels, referencing | |
785 @cindex Selection buffer, labels | |
786 @cindex Selection process | |
787 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
788 @kindex C-c ) | |
789 @findex reftex-reference | |
790 | |
59536 | 791 @vindex reftex-trust-label-prefix |
792 @b{Ref@TeX{}} scans the document in order to find all labels. To make | |
793 referencing labels easier, it assigns to each label a category, the | |
794 @emph{label type} (for example section, table, figure, equation, etc.). | |
795 In order to determine the label type, RefTeX parses around each label | |
796 to see in what kind of environments it is located. You can speed up | |
797 the parsing by using type-specific prefixes for labels and configuring | |
798 the variable @code{reftex-trust-label-prefix}. | |
799 | |
25829 | 800 Referencing Labels is really at the heart of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Press @kbd{C-c |
801 )} in order to reference a label (reftex-reference). This will start a | |
802 selection process and finally insert the complete @samp{\ref@{label@}} | |
59536 | 803 into the buffer. |
25829 | 804 |
805 First, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will determine the label category which is required. | |
806 Often that can be figured out from context. For example, if you | |
807 write @samp{As shown in eq.} and the press @kbd{C-c )}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows | |
808 that an equation label is going to be referenced. If it cannot figure | |
59536 | 809 out what label category is needed, it will query for one. |
25829 | 810 |
811 You will then be presented with a label selection menu. This is a | |
812 special buffer which contains an outline of the document along with all | |
813 labels of the given label category. In addition, next to the label | |
814 there will be one line of context of the label definition, which is some | |
815 text in the buffer near the label definition. Usually this is | |
816 sufficient to identify the label. If you are unsure about a certain | |
817 label, pressing @key{SPC} will show the label definition point in | |
59536 | 818 another window. |
25829 | 819 |
820 In order to reference a label, move to cursor to the correct label and | |
821 press @key{RET}. You can also reference several labels with a single | |
822 call to @code{reftex-reference} by marking entries with the @kbd{m} | |
823 key (see below). | |
824 | |
825 @kindex ? | |
826 Here is a list of special commands in the selection buffer. A summary | |
827 of this information is always available from the selection process by | |
59536 | 828 pressing @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 829 |
830 | |
831 | |
832 @table @kbd | |
833 @tablesubheading{General} | |
834 @item ? | |
835 Show a summary of available commands. | |
836 | |
837 @item 0-9,- | |
838 Prefix argument. | |
839 | |
840 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
841 @item n | |
842 Go to next label. | |
843 | |
844 @item p | |
845 Go to previous label. | |
846 | |
847 @item b | |
848 Jump back to the position where you last left the selection buffer. | |
59536 | 849 Normally this should get you back to the last referenced label. |
25829 | 850 |
851 @item C-c C-n | |
852 Goto next section heading. | |
853 | |
854 @item C-c C-p | |
855 Goto previous section heading. | |
856 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
857 @item N z |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
858 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example @kbd{3 z} jumps to |
59536 | 859 section 3. |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
860 |
25829 | 861 @tablesubheading{Displaying Context} |
862 @item @key{SPC} | |
863 Show the surroundings of the definition of the current label in another | |
59536 | 864 window. See also the @kbd{f} key. |
25829 | 865 |
866 @item f | |
867 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
868 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
869 always display the full context of the current label. This is similar | |
870 to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. Note that only context | |
871 in files already visited is shown. @b{RefTeX} will not visit a file | |
872 just for follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
59536 | 873 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. |
25829 | 874 |
875 @item . | |
876 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
59536 | 877 called @code{reftex-reference}. |
25829 | 878 |
879 @tablesubheading{Selecting a label and creating the reference} | |
880 @item @key{RET} | |
881 Insert a reference to the label at point into the buffer from which the | |
882 selection process was started. When entries have been marked, @key{RET} | |
59536 | 883 references all marked labels. |
25829 | 884 |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
885 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 886 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
887 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a label will accept it like @key{RET} | |
888 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
59536 | 889 (Misc)}. |
25829 | 890 |
891 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
892 @item m - + , | |
893 Mark the current entry. When several entries have been marked, pressing | |
894 @kbd{RET} will accept all of them and place them into several | |
895 @code{\ref} macros. The special markers @samp{,-+} also store a | |
896 separator to be inserted before the corresponding reference. So marking | |
897 six entries with the keys @samp{m , , - , +} will give a reference list | |
898 like this (see the variable @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation}) | |
899 @example | |
900 In eqs. (1), (2), (3)--(4), (5) and (6) | |
901 @end example | |
902 | |
903 @item u | |
904 Unmark a marked entry. | |
905 | |
906 @c FIXME: Do we need `A' as well for consistency? | |
907 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{saferef} | |
908 @cindex @code{saferef}, LaTeX package | |
909 @item a | |
910 Accept the marked entries and put all labels as a comma-separated list | |
911 into one @emph{single} @code{\ref} macro. Some packages like | |
59536 | 912 @file{saferef.sty} support multiple references in this way. |
25829 | 913 |
914 @item l | |
915 Use the last referenced label(s) again. This is equivalent to moving to | |
59536 | 916 that label and pressing @key{RET}. |
25829 | 917 |
918 @item @key{TAB} | |
919 Enter a label with completion. This may also be a label which does not | |
920 yet exist in the document. | |
921 | |
922 @item v | |
923 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
924 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
925 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
926 Toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} macro for references. The | |
927 @code{\vref} macro is defined in the @code{varioref} LaTeX package. | |
928 With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a @code{\vref} | |
929 macro. The current state of this flag is displayed by the @samp{S<>} | |
59536 | 930 indicator in the mode line of the selection buffer. |
25829 | 931 |
932 @item V | |
933 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
934 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
935 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
936 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
937 Cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The | |
938 @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} macros are defined in the @code{fancyref} | |
939 LaTeX package. With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a | |
940 @code{\fref} or @code{\Fref} macro. The current state of this flag is | |
941 displayed by the @samp{S<>} indicator in the mode line of the | |
942 selection buffer. | |
943 | |
944 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
945 | |
946 @item q | |
947 Exit the selection process without inserting any reference into the | |
59536 | 948 buffer. |
25829 | 949 |
950 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
951 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
952 The defaults for the following flags can be configured with the variable |
25829 | 953 @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing Labels)}). |
954 | |
955 @item c | |
956 Toggle the display of the one-line label definition context in the | |
59536 | 957 selection buffer. |
25829 | 958 |
959 @item F | |
960 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
59536 | 961 selection buffer. |
25829 | 962 |
963 @item t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
964 Toggle the display of the table of contents in the selection buffer. |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
965 With prefix @var{arg}, change the maximum level of toc entries displayed |
59536 | 966 to @var{arg}. Chapters are level 1, section are level 2. |
25829 | 967 |
968 @item # | |
59536 | 969 Toggle the display of a label counter in the selection buffer. |
25829 | 970 |
971 @item % | |
972 Toggle the display of labels hidden in comments in the selection | |
973 buffers. Sometimes, you may have commented out parts of your document. | |
974 If these parts contain label definitions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can still display | |
59536 | 975 and reference these labels. |
25829 | 976 |
977 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
978 @item g | |
979 Update the menu. This will rebuilt the menu from the internal label | |
59536 | 980 list, but not reparse the document (see @kbd{r}). |
25829 | 981 |
982 @item r | |
983 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
984 Reparse the document to update the information on all labels and rebuild | |
985 the menu. If the variable @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is | |
986 non-@code{nil} and your document is a multifile document, this will | |
987 reparse only a part of the document (the file in which the label at | |
59536 | 988 point was defined). |
25829 | 989 |
990 @item C-u r | |
991 Reparse the @emph{entire} document. | |
992 | |
993 @item s | |
994 Switch the label category. After prompting for another label category, | |
59536 | 995 a menu for that category will be shown. |
25829 | 996 |
997 @item x | |
998 Reference a label from an external document. With the LaTeX package | |
999 @code{xr} it is possible to reference labels defined in another | |
1000 document. This key will switch to the label menu of an external | |
1001 document and let you select a label from there (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
59536 | 1002 package),,xr}). |
25829 | 1003 |
1004 @end table | |
1005 | |
1006 @vindex reftex-select-label-map | |
1007 In order to define additional commands for the selection process, the | |
59536 | 1008 keymap @code{reftex-select-label-map} may be used. |
25829 | 1009 |
1010 @node Builtin Label Environments, Defining Label Environments, Referencing Labels, Labels and References | |
1011 @section Builtin Label Environments | |
1012 @cindex Builtin label environments | |
1013 @cindex Label environments, builtin | |
1014 @cindex Environments, builtin | |
1015 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
1016 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
1017 | |
1018 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced | |
1019 with a label (i.e. which carry their own counters). By default, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
1020 recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The | |
1021 LaTeX Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley | |
59536 | 1022 1994.}. These are: |
25829 | 1023 |
1024 @itemize @minus | |
1025 @item | |
1026 @cindex @code{figure}, LaTeX environment | |
1027 @cindex @code{figure*}, LaTeX environment | |
1028 @cindex @code{table}, LaTeX environment | |
1029 @cindex @code{table*}, LaTeX environment | |
1030 @cindex @code{equation}, LaTeX environment | |
1031 @cindex @code{eqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
1032 @cindex @code{enumerate}, LaTeX environment | |
1033 @cindex @code{\footnote}, LaTeX macro | |
1034 @cindex LaTeX macro @code{footnote} | |
1035 @cindex LaTeX core | |
1036 @code{figure}, @code{figure*}, @code{table}, @code{table*}, @code{equation}, | |
1037 @code{eqnarray}, @code{enumerate}, the @code{\footnote} macro (this is | |
59536 | 1038 the LaTeX core stuff) |
25829 | 1039 @item |
1040 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1041 @cindex @code{amsmath}, LaTeX package | |
1042 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{amsmath} | |
1043 @cindex @code{align}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1044 @cindex @code{gather}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1045 @cindex @code{multline}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1046 @cindex @code{flalign}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1047 @cindex @code{alignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1048 @cindex @code{xalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1049 @cindex @code{xxalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1050 @cindex @code{subequations}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1051 @code{align}, @code{gather}, @code{multline}, @code{flalign}, | |
1052 @code{alignat}, @code{xalignat}, @code{xxalignat}, @code{subequations} | |
59536 | 1053 (from AMS-LaTeX's @file{amsmath.sty} package) |
25829 | 1054 @item |
1055 @cindex @code{endnote}, LaTeX package | |
1056 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{endnote} | |
1057 @cindex @code{\endnote}, LaTeX macro | |
1058 the @code{\endnote} macro (from @file{endnotes.sty}) | |
1059 @item | |
1060 @cindex @code{fancybox}, LaTeX package | |
1061 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancybox} | |
1062 @cindex @code{Beqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
1063 @code{Beqnarray} (@file{fancybox.sty}) | |
1064 @item | |
1065 @cindex @code{floatfig}, LaTeX package | |
1066 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{floatfig} | |
1067 @cindex @code{floatingfig}, LaTeX environment | |
1068 @code{floatingfig} (@file{floatfig.sty}) | |
1069 @item | |
1070 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX package | |
1071 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{longtable} | |
1072 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1073 @code{longtable} (@file{longtable.sty}) | |
1074 @item | |
1075 @cindex @code{picinpar}, LaTeX package | |
1076 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{picinpar} | |
1077 @cindex @code{figwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1078 @cindex @code{tabwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1079 @code{figwindow}, @code{tabwindow} (@file{picinpar.sty}) | |
1080 @item | |
1081 @cindex @code{sidecap}, LaTeX package | |
1082 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{sidecap} | |
1083 @cindex @code{SCfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1084 @cindex @code{SCtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1085 @code{SCfigure}, @code{SCtable} (@file{sidecap.sty}) | |
1086 @item | |
1087 @cindex @code{rotating}, LaTeX package | |
1088 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{rotating} | |
1089 @cindex @code{sidewaysfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1090 @cindex @code{sidewaystable}, LaTeX environment | |
1091 @code{sidewaysfigure}, @code{sidewaystable} (@file{rotating.sty}) | |
1092 @item | |
1093 @cindex @code{subfig}, LaTeX package | |
1094 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{subfigure} | |
1095 @cindex @code{subfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1096 @cindex @code{subfigure*}, LaTeX environment | |
1097 @code{subfigure}, @code{subfigure*}, the @code{\subfigure} macro | |
59536 | 1098 (@file{subfigure.sty}) |
25829 | 1099 @item |
1100 @cindex @code{supertab}, LaTeX package | |
1101 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{supertab} | |
1102 @cindex @code{supertabular}, LaTeX environment | |
1103 @code{supertabular} (@file{supertab.sty}) | |
1104 @item | |
1105 @cindex @code{wrapfig}, LaTeX package | |
1106 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{wrapfig} | |
1107 @cindex @code{wrapfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1108 @code{wrapfigure} (@file{wrapfig.sty}) | |
1109 @end itemize | |
1110 | |
1111 If you want to use other labeled environments, defined with | |
1112 @code{\newtheorem}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured to recognize | |
59536 | 1113 them (@pxref{Defining Label Environments}). |
25829 | 1114 |
1115 @node Defining Label Environments, Reference Info, Builtin Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1116 @section Defining Label Environments | |
1117 @cindex Label environments, defining | |
1118 | |
1119 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
1120 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to recognize additional labeled | |
1121 environments and macros. This is done with the variable | |
1122 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@pxref{Options (Defining Label | |
1123 Environments)}). If you are not familiar with Lisp, you can use the | |
1124 @code{custom} library to configure this rather complex variable. To do | |
1125 this, use | |
1126 | |
1127 @example | |
1128 @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-label-alist @key{RET}} | |
1129 @end example | |
1130 | |
1131 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
1132 Here we will discuss a few examples, in order to make things clearer. | |
1133 It can also be instructive to look at the constant | |
1134 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin} which contains the entries for | |
1135 all the builtin environments and macros (@pxref{Builtin Label | |
59536 | 1136 Environments}). |
25829 | 1137 |
1138 @menu | |
1139 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
1140 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
1141 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
1142 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
1143 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
1144 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
1145 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
1146 @end menu | |
1147 | |
1148 @node Theorem and Axiom, Quick Equation, , Defining Label Environments | |
1149 @subsection Theorem and Axiom Environments | |
1150 @cindex @code{theorem}, newtheorem | |
1151 @cindex @code{axiom}, newtheorem | |
1152 @cindex @code{\newtheorem} | |
1153 | |
1154 Suppose you are using @code{\newtheorem} in LaTeX in order to define two | |
59536 | 1155 new environments, @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} |
25829 | 1156 |
1157 @example | |
1158 \newtheorem@{axiom@}@{Axiom@} | |
1159 \newtheorem@{theorem@}@{Theorem@} | |
1160 @end example | |
1161 | |
1162 @noindent | |
1163 to be used like this: | |
1164 | |
1165 @example | |
1166 \begin@{axiom@} | |
1167 \label@{ax:first@} | |
1168 .... | |
1169 \end@{axiom@} | |
1170 @end example | |
1171 | |
1172 So we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new | |
1173 labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can | |
1174 either use Lisp to do this (e.g. in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom | |
1175 library. With Lisp it would look like this | |
1176 | |
1177 @lisp | |
1178 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1179 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1180 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "th.") -3))) |
25829 | 1181 @end lisp |
1182 | |
1183 The type indicator characters @code{?a} and @code{?h} are used for | |
1184 prompts when @b{Ref@TeX{}} queries for a label type. @code{?h} | |
1185 was chosen for @code{theorem} since @code{?t} is already taken by | |
1186 @code{table}. Note that also @code{?s}, @code{?f}, @code{?e}, | |
59536 | 1187 @code{?i}, @code{?n} are already used for standard environments. |
25829 | 1188 |
1189 @noindent | |
1190 The labels for Axioms and Theorems will have the prefixes @samp{ax:} and | |
1191 @samp{thr:}, respectively. @xref{AUCTeX}, for information on how | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1192 AUCTeX can use RefTeX to automatically create labels when a new environment |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1193 is inserted into a buffer. Additionally, the following needs to be |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1194 added to one's .emacs file before AUCTeX will automatically create |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1195 labels for the new environments. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1196 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1197 @lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1198 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1199 (lambda () |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1200 (LaTeX-add-environments |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1201 '("axiom" LaTeX-env-label) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1202 '("theorem" LaTeX-env-label)))) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1203 @end lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1204 |
25829 | 1205 |
1206 @noindent | |
1207 The @samp{~\ref@{%s@}} is a format string indicating how to insert | |
59536 | 1208 references to these labels. |
25829 | 1209 |
1210 @noindent | |
59536 | 1211 The next item indicates how to grab context of the label definition. |
25829 | 1212 @itemize @minus |
1213 @item | |
1214 @code{t} means to get it from a default location (from the beginning of | |
1215 a @code{\macro} or after the @code{\begin} statement). @code{t} is | |
59536 | 1216 @emph{not} a good choice for eqnarray and similar environments. |
1217 @item | |
1218 @code{nil} means to use the text right after the label definition. | |
25829 | 1219 @item |
1220 For more complex ways of getting context, see the variable | |
1221 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@ref{Options (Defining Label | |
59536 | 1222 Environments)}). |
25829 | 1223 @end itemize |
1224 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1225 The following list of strings is used to guess the correct label type |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1226 from the word before point when creating a reference. E.g. if you |
25829 | 1227 write: @samp{As we have shown in Theorem} and then press @kbd{C-c )}, |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1228 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that you are looking for a theorem label and |
59536 | 1229 restrict the menu to only these labels without even asking. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1230 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1231 The final item in each entry is the level at which the environment |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1232 should produce entries in the table of context buffer. If the number is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1233 positive, the environment will produce numbered entries (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1234 @code{\section}), if it is negative the entries will be unnumbered (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1235 @code{\section*}). Use this only for environments which structure the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1236 document similar to sectioning commands. For everything else, omit the |
59536 | 1237 item. |
25829 | 1238 |
1239 To do the same configuration with @code{customize}, you need to click on | |
1240 the @code{[INS]} button twice to create two templates and fill them in | |
59536 | 1241 like this: |
25829 | 1242 |
1243 @example | |
1244 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1245 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1246 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: axiom | |
1247 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : a | |
1248 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: ax: | |
1249 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1250 Context method : [Value Menu] After label | |
1251 Magic words: | |
1252 [INS] [DEL] String: axiom | |
1253 [INS] [DEL] String: ax. | |
1254 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1255 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -2 |
25829 | 1256 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: |
1257 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: theorem | |
1258 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : h | |
1259 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: thr: | |
1260 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1261 Context method : [Value Menu] Default position | |
1262 Magic words: | |
1263 [INS] [DEL] String: theorem | |
1264 [INS] [DEL] String: theor. | |
1265 [INS] [DEL] String: th. | |
1266 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1267 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -3 |
25829 | 1268 @end example |
1269 | |
1270 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
1271 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
1272 Depending on how you would like the label insertion and selection for | |
1273 the new environments to work, you might want to add the letters @samp{a} | |
1274 and @samp{h} to some of the flags in the variables | |
1275 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating Labels)}) | |
1276 and @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing | |
59536 | 1277 Labels)}). |
25829 | 1278 |
1279 | |
1280 @node Quick Equation, Figure Wrapper, Theorem and Axiom , Defining Label Environments | |
1281 @subsection Quick Equation Macro | |
1282 @cindex Quick equation macro | |
1283 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1284 | |
1285 Suppose you would like to have a macro for quick equations. It | |
1286 could be defined like this: | |
1287 | |
1288 @example | |
1289 \newcommand@{\quickeq@}[1]@{\begin@{equation@} #1 \end@{equation@}@} | |
1290 @end example | |
1291 | |
1292 @noindent | |
1293 and used like this: | |
1294 | |
1295 @example | |
1296 Einstein's equation is \quickeq@{E=mc^2 \label@{eq:einstein@}@}. | |
1297 @end example | |
1298 | |
1299 We need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that any label defined in the argument of the | |
1300 @code{\quickeq} is an equation label. Here is how to do this with lisp: | |
1301 | |
1302 @lisp | |
1303 (setq reftex-label-alist '(("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil))) | |
1304 @end lisp | |
1305 | |
1306 The first element in this list is now the macro with empty braces as an | |
1307 @emph{image} of the macro arguments. @code{?e} indicates that this is | |
1308 an equation label, the different @code{nil} elements indicate to use the | |
1309 default values for equations. The @samp{1} as the fifth element | |
1310 indicates that the context of the label definition should be the 1st | |
59536 | 1311 argument of the macro. |
25829 | 1312 |
1313 Here is again how this would look in the customization buffer: | |
1314 | |
1315 @example | |
1316 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1317 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1318 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \quickeq@{@} | |
1319 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : e | |
1320 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
1321 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1322 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 1 | |
1323 Magic words: | |
1324 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1325 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1326 @end example |
1327 | |
1328 @node Figure Wrapper, Adding Magic Words, Quick Equation, Defining Label Environments | |
1329 @subsection Figure Wrapping Macro | |
1330 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1331 @cindex Figure wrapping macro | |
1332 | |
1333 Suppose you want to make figures not directly with the figure | |
1334 environment, but with a macro like | |
1335 | |
1336 @example | |
1337 \newcommand@{\myfig@}[5][tbp]@{% | |
1338 \begin@{figure@}[#1] | |
1339 \epsimp[#5]@{#2@} | |
1340 \caption@{#3@} | |
1341 \label@{#4@} | |
1342 \end@{figure@}@} | |
1343 @end example | |
1344 | |
1345 @noindent | |
1346 which would be called like | |
1347 | |
1348 @example | |
1349 \myfig[htp]@{filename@}@{caption text@}@{label@}@{1@} | |
1350 @end example | |
1351 | |
1352 Now we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that the 4th argument of the | |
1353 @code{\myfig} macro @emph{is itself} a figure label, and where to find | |
59536 | 1354 the context. |
25829 | 1355 |
1356 @lisp | |
1357 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1358 '(("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3))) | |
1359 @end lisp | |
1360 | |
1361 The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the | |
1362 @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} | |
1363 indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with | |
1364 labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for | |
1365 prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. | |
1366 The @samp{3} for the context method means to grab the 3rd macro argument | |
59536 | 1367 - the caption. |
25829 | 1368 |
1369 As a side effect of this configuration, @code{reftex-label} will now | |
1370 insert the required naked label (without the @code{\label} macro) when | |
1371 point is directly after the opening parenthesis of a @code{\myfig} macro | |
59536 | 1372 argument. |
25829 | 1373 |
1374 Again, here the configuration in the customization buffer: | |
1375 | |
1376 @example | |
1377 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1378 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@} | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1379 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : f |
25829 | 1380 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default |
1381 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1382 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 3 | |
1383 Magic words: | |
1384 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1385 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1386 @end example |
1387 | |
1388 @node Adding Magic Words, Using \eqref, Figure Wrapper, Defining Label Environments | |
1389 @subsection Adding Magic Words | |
1390 @cindex Magic words | |
1391 @cindex German magic words | |
1392 @cindex Label category | |
1393 | |
1394 Sometimes you don't want to define a new label environment or macro, but | |
1395 just change the information associated with a label category. Maybe you | |
1396 want to add some magic words, for another language. Changing only the | |
1397 information associated with a label category is done by giving | |
1398 @code{nil} for the environment name and then specify the items you want | |
1399 to define. Here is an example which adds German magic words to all | |
59536 | 1400 predefined label categories. |
25829 | 1401 |
1402 @lisp | |
1403 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1404 '((nil ?s nil nil nil ("Kapitel" "Kap." "Abschnitt" "Teil")) | |
1405 (nil ?e nil nil nil ("Gleichung" "Gl.")) | |
1406 (nil ?t nil nil nil ("Tabelle")) | |
1407 (nil ?f nil nil nil ("Figur" "Abbildung" "Abb.")) | |
1408 (nil ?n nil nil nil ("Anmerkung" "Anm.")) | |
1409 (nil ?i nil nil nil ("Punkt")))) | |
1410 @end lisp | |
1411 | |
1412 @node Using \eqref, Non-Standard Environments, Adding Magic Words, Defining Label Environments | |
1413 @subsection Using @code{\eqref} | |
1414 @cindex @code{\eqref}, AMS-LaTeX macro | |
1415 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1416 @cindex Label category | |
1417 | |
1418 Another case where one only wants to change the information associated | |
1419 with the label category is to change the macro which is used for | |
1420 referencing the label. When working with the AMS-LaTeX stuff, you might | |
1421 prefer @code{\eqref} for doing equation references. Here is how to | |
1422 do this: | |
1423 | |
1424 @lisp | |
1425 (setq reftex-label-alist '((nil ?e nil "~\\eqref@{%s@}" nil nil))) | |
1426 @end lisp | |
1427 | |
1428 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has also a predefined symbol for this special purpose. The | |
59536 | 1429 following is equivalent to the line above. |
25829 | 1430 |
1431 @lisp | |
1432 (setq reftex-label-alist '(AMSTeX)) | |
1433 @end lisp | |
1434 | |
1435 Note that this is automatically done by the @file{amsmath.el} style file | |
1436 of AUCTeX (@pxref{Style Files}) - so if you use AUCTeX, | |
59536 | 1437 this configuration will not be necessary. |
25829 | 1438 |
1439 @node Non-Standard Environments, Putting it Together, Using \eqref, Defining Label Environments | |
1440 @subsection Non-standard Environments | |
1441 @cindex Non-standard environments | |
1442 @cindex Environments without @code{\begin} | |
1443 @cindex Special parser functions | |
1444 @cindex Parser functions, for special environments | |
1445 | |
1446 Some LaTeX packages define environment-like structures without using the | |
1447 standard @samp{\begin..\end} structure. @b{Ref@TeX{}} cannot parse | |
1448 these directly, but you can write your own special-purpose parser and | |
1449 use it instead of the name of an environment in an entry for | |
1450 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The function should check if point is | |
1451 currently in the special environment it was written to detect. If so, | |
1452 it must return a buffer position indicating the start of this | |
1453 environment. The return value must be @code{nil} on failure to detect | |
1454 the environment. The function is called with one argument @var{bound}. | |
1455 If non-@code{nil}, @var{bound} is a boundary for backwards searches | |
59536 | 1456 which should be observed. We will discuss two examples. |
25829 | 1457 |
1458 @cindex LaTeX commands, abbreviated | |
1459 | |
1460 Some people define abbreviations for | |
1461 environments, like @code{\be} for @code{\begin@{equation@}}, and | |
1462 @code{\ee} for @code{\end@{equation@}}. The parser function would have | |
1463 to search backward for these macros. When the first match is | |
1464 @code{\ee}, point is not in this environment. When the first match is | |
1465 @code{\be}, point is in this environment and the function must return | |
1466 the beginning of the match. To avoid scanning too far, we can also look | |
46272 | 1467 for empty lines which cannot occur inside an equation environment. |
59536 | 1468 Here is the setup: |
25829 | 1469 |
1470 @lisp | |
1471 ;; Setup entry in reftex-label-alist, using all defaults for equations | |
1472 (setq reftex-label-alist '((detect-be-ee ?e nil nil nil nil))) | |
1473 | |
1474 (defun detect-be-ee (bound) | |
1475 ;; Search backward for the macros or an empty line | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1476 (if (re-search-backward |
25829 | 1477 "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\|\\\\ee\\>\\)\\|\\(\\\\be\\>\\)" bound t) |
1478 (if (match-beginning 2) | |
1479 (match-beginning 2) ; Return start of environment | |
1480 nil) ; Return nil because env is closed | |
1481 nil)) ; Return nil for not found | |
1482 @end lisp | |
1483 | |
1484 @cindex @code{linguex}, LaTeX package | |
1485 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{linguex} | |
1486 A more complex example is the @file{linguex.sty} package which defines | |
1487 list macros @samp{\ex.}, @samp{\a.}, @samp{\b.} etc. for lists which are | |
59536 | 1488 terminated by @samp{\z.} or by an empty line. |
25829 | 1489 |
1490 @example | |
1491 \ex. \label@{ex:12@} Some text in an exotic language ... | |
1492 \a. \label@{ex:13@} more stuff | |
1493 \b. \label@{ex:14@} still more stuff | |
1494 \a. List on a deeper level | |
1495 \b. Another item | |
1496 \b. and the third one | |
1497 \z. | |
1498 \b. Third item on this level. | |
1499 | |
1500 ... text after the empty line terminating all lists | |
1501 @end example | |
1502 | |
1503 The difficulty is that the @samp{\a.} lists can nest and that an empty | |
1504 line terminates all list levels in one go. So we have to count nesting | |
1505 levels between @samp{\a.} and @samp{\z.}. Here is the implementation | |
1506 for @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
1507 | |
1508 @lisp | |
1509 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1510 '((detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1511 | |
1512 (defun detect-linguex (bound) | |
1513 (let ((cnt 0)) | |
1514 (catch 'exit | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1515 (while |
25829 | 1516 ;; Search backward for all possible delimiters |
1517 (re-search-backward | |
1518 (concat "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\)\\|\\(\\\\z\\.\\)\\|" | |
1519 "\\(\\ex[ig]?\\.\\)\\|\\(\\\\a\\.\\)") | |
1520 nil t) | |
1521 ;; Check which delimiter was matched. | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1522 (cond |
25829 | 1523 ((match-beginning 1) |
1524 ;; empty line terminates all - return nil | |
1525 (throw 'exit nil)) | |
1526 ((match-beginning 2) | |
1527 ;; \z. terminates one list level - decrease nesting count | |
1528 (decf cnt)) | |
1529 ((match-beginning 3) | |
1530 ;; \ex. : return match unless there was a \z. on this level | |
1531 (throw 'exit (if (>= cnt 0) (match-beginning 3) nil))) | |
1532 ((match-beginning 4) | |
1533 ;; \a. : return match when on level 0, otherwise | |
1534 ;; increment nesting count | |
1535 (if (>= cnt 0) | |
1536 (throw 'exit (match-beginning 4)) | |
1537 (incf cnt)))))))) | |
1538 @end lisp | |
1539 | |
1540 @node Putting it Together, , Non-Standard Environments, Defining Label Environments | |
1541 @subsection Putting it all together | |
1542 | |
1543 When you have to put several entries into @code{reftex-label-alist}, just | |
1544 put them after each other in a list, or create that many templates in | |
1545 the customization buffer. Here is a lisp example which uses several of | |
1546 the entries described above: | |
1547 | |
1548 @lisp | |
1549 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1550 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1551 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "theor." "th.") -3) |
25829 | 1552 ("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil) |
1553 AMSTeX | |
1554 ("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3) | |
1555 (detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1556 @end lisp | |
1557 | |
1558 @node Reference Info, xr (LaTeX package), Defining Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1559 @section Reference Info | |
1560 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
1561 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1562 @cindex Cross-references, displaying | |
1563 @cindex Reference info | |
1564 @cindex Displaying cross-references | |
1565 @cindex Viewing cross-references | |
1566 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1567 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 1568 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1569 When point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1570 argument of a @code{\ref} macro, the echo area will display some |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1571 information about the label referenced there. Note that the information |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1572 is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied by a different |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1573 message. |
25829 | 1574 |
1575 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the label definition corresponding to a | |
1576 @code{\ref} macro, or all reference locations corresponding to a | |
1577 @code{\label} macro. @xref{Viewing Cross-References}, for more | |
59536 | 1578 information. |
25829 | 1579 |
1580 @node xr (LaTeX package), varioref (LaTeX package), Reference Info, Labels and References | |
1581 @section @code{xr}: Cross-Document References | |
1582 @cindex @code{xr}, LaTeX package | |
1583 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{xr} | |
1584 @cindex @code{\externaldocument} | |
1585 @cindex External documents | |
1586 @cindex References to external documents | |
1587 @cindex Cross-document references | |
1588 | |
1589 The LaTeX package @code{xr} makes it possible to create references to | |
1590 labels defined in external documents. The preamble of a document using | |
59536 | 1591 @code{xr} will contain something like this: |
25829 | 1592 |
1593 @example | |
1594 \usepackage@{xr@} | |
1595 \externaldocument[V1-]@{volume1@} | |
1596 \externaldocument[V3-]@{volume3@} | |
1597 @end example | |
1598 | |
1599 @noindent | |
1600 and we can make references to any labels defined in these | |
1601 external documents by using the prefixes @samp{V1-} and @samp{V3-}, | |
59536 | 1602 respectively. |
25829 | 1603 |
1604 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be used to create such references as well. Start the | |
1605 referencing process normally, by pressing @kbd{C-c )}. Select a label | |
1606 type if necessary. When you see the label selection buffer, pressing | |
1607 @kbd{x} will switch to the label selection buffer of one of the external | |
1608 documents. You may then select a label as before and @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
59536 | 1609 insert it along with the required prefix. |
25829 | 1610 |
1611 For this kind of inter-document cross-references, saving of parsing | |
1612 information and the use of multiple selection buffers can mean a large | |
59536 | 1613 speed-up (@pxref{Optimizations}). |
25829 | 1614 |
1615 @node varioref (LaTeX package), fancyref (LaTeX package), xr (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1616 @section @code{varioref}: Variable Page References | |
1617 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
1618 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
1619 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
1620 @vindex reftex-vref-is-default | |
1621 @code{varioref} is a frequently used LaTeX package to create | |
1622 cross--references with page information. When you want to make a | |
1623 reference with the @code{\vref} macro, just press the @kbd{v} key in the | |
1624 selection buffer to toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} | |
1625 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1626 shows the current status of this switch. If you find that you almost | |
1627 always use @code{\vref}, you may want to make it the default by | |
1628 customizing the variable @code{reftex-vref-is-default}. If this | |
1629 toggling seems too inconvenient, you can also use the command | |
1630 @code{reftex-varioref-vref}@footnote{bind it to @kbd{C-c v}.}. | |
59536 | 1631 Or use AUCTeX to create your macros (@pxref{AUCTeX}). |
25829 | 1632 |
1633 @node fancyref (LaTeX package), , varioref (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1634 @section @code{fancyref}: Fancy Cross References | |
1635 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
1636 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
1637 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
1638 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
1639 @vindex reftex-fref-is-default | |
1640 @code{fancyref} is a LaTeX package where a macro call like | |
1641 @code{\fref@{@var{fig:map-of-germany}@}} creates not only the number of | |
1642 the referenced counter but also the complete text around it, like | |
1643 @samp{Figure 3 on the preceding page}. In order to make it work you | |
1644 need to use label prefixes like @samp{fig:} consistently - something | |
1645 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does automatically. When you want to make a reference | |
1646 with the @code{\fref} macro, just press the @kbd{V} key in the selection | |
1647 buffer to cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} | |
1648 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1649 shows the current status of this switch. If this cycling seems | |
1650 inconvenient, you can also use the commands @code{reftex-fancyref-fref} | |
1651 and @code{reftex-fancyref-Fref}@footnote{bind them to @kbd{C-c | |
1652 f} and @kbd{C-c F}.}. Or use AUCTeX to create your macros | |
59536 | 1653 (@pxref{AUCTeX}). |
25829 | 1654 |
1655 @node Citations, Index Support, Labels and References, Top | |
1656 @chapter Citations | |
1657 @cindex Citations | |
1658 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
1659 | |
1660 Citations in LaTeX are done with the @code{\cite} macro or variations of | |
1661 it. The argument of the macro is a citation key which identifies an | |
1662 article or book in either a BibTeX database file or in an explicit | |
1663 @code{thebibliography} environment in the document. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
59536 | 1664 support for citations helps to select the correct key quickly. |
25829 | 1665 |
1666 @menu | |
1667 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
1668 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
1669 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
1670 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
1671 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
59536 | 1672 * BibTeX Database Subsets:: Extract parts of a big database. |
25829 | 1673 @end menu |
1674 | |
1675 @node Creating Citations, Citation Styles, , Citations | |
1676 @section Creating Citations | |
1677 @cindex Creating citations | |
1678 @cindex Citations, creating | |
1679 @findex reftex-citation | |
1680 @kindex C-c [ | |
1681 @cindex Selection buffer, citations | |
1682 @cindex Selection process | |
1683 | |
1684 In order to create a citation, press @kbd{C-c [}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} then | |
1685 prompts for a regular expression which will be used to search through | |
1686 the database and present the list of matches to choose from in a | |
1687 selection process similar to that for selecting labels | |
59536 | 1688 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
25829 | 1689 |
1690 The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a | |
1691 logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example | |
1692 @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention | |
1693 Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and | |
1694 Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on | |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
1695 known citation keys. RefTeX also offers a default when prompting for a |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1696 regular expression. This default is the word before the cursor or the |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
1697 word before the current @samp{\cite} command. Sometimes this may be a |
59536 | 1698 good search key. |
25829 | 1699 |
1700 @cindex @code{\bibliography} | |
1701 @cindex @code{thebibliography}, LaTeX environment | |
1702 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
1703 @cindex @code{TEXBIB}, environment variable | |
1704 @b{Ref@TeX{}} prefers to use BibTeX database files specified with a | |
1705 @code{\bibliography} macro to collect its information. Just like | |
1706 BibTeX, it will search for the specified files in the current directory | |
1707 and along the path given in the environment variable @code{BIBINPUTS}. | |
1708 If you do not use BibTeX, but the document contains an explicit | |
1709 @code{thebibliography} environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will collect its | |
1710 information from there. Note that in this case the information | |
1711 presented in the selection buffer will just be a copy of relevant | |
1712 @code{\bibitem} entries, not the structured listing available with | |
59536 | 1713 BibTeX database files. |
25829 | 1714 |
1715 @kindex ? | |
1716 In the selection buffer, the following keys provide special commands. A | |
1717 summary of this information is always available from the selection | |
59536 | 1718 process by pressing @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 1719 |
1720 @table @kbd | |
1721 @tablesubheading{General} | |
1722 @item ? | |
1723 Show a summary of available commands. | |
1724 | |
1725 @item 0-9,- | |
1726 Prefix argument. | |
1727 | |
1728 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
1729 @item n | |
1730 Go to next article. | |
1731 | |
1732 @item p | |
1733 Go to previous article. | |
1734 | |
1735 @tablesubheading{Access to full database entries} | |
1736 @item @key{SPC} | |
1737 Show the database entry corresponding to the article at point, in | |
59536 | 1738 another window. See also the @kbd{f} key. |
25829 | 1739 |
1740 @item f | |
1741 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
1742 always display the full database entry of the current article. This is | |
1743 equivalent to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. With BibTeX | |
59536 | 1744 entries, follow mode can be rather slow. |
25829 | 1745 |
1746 @tablesubheading{Selecting entries and creating the citation} | |
1747 @item @key{RET} | |
1748 Insert a citation referencing the article at point into the buffer from | |
59536 | 1749 which the selection process was started. |
25829 | 1750 |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1751 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 1752 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
1753 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a citation will accept it like @key{RET} | |
1754 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
59536 | 1755 (Misc)}. |
25829 | 1756 |
1757 @item m | |
1758 Mark the current entry. When one or several entries are marked, | |
1759 pressing @kbd{a} or @kbd{A} accepts all marked entries. Also, | |
1760 @key{RET} behaves like the @kbd{a} key. | |
1761 | |
1762 @item u | |
1763 Unmark a marked entry. | |
1764 | |
1765 @item a | |
1766 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a single | |
59536 | 1767 @code{\cite} macro referring to them. |
25829 | 1768 |
1769 @item A | |
1770 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a | |
59536 | 1771 separate @code{\cite} macro for each of it. |
1772 | |
1773 @item e | |
1774 Create a new BibTeX database file which contains all @i{marked} entries | |
1775 in the selection buffer. If no entries are marked, all entries are | |
1776 selected. | |
1777 | |
1778 @item E | |
1779 Create a new BibTeX database file which contains all @i{unmarked} | |
1780 entries in the selection buffer. If no entries are marked, all entries | |
1781 are selected. | |
25829 | 1782 |
1783 @item @key{TAB} | |
1784 Enter a citation key with completion. This may also be a key which does | |
1785 not yet exist. | |
1786 | |
1787 @item . | |
1788 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
59536 | 1789 called @code{reftex-citation}. |
25829 | 1790 |
1791 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
1792 @item q | |
1793 Exit the selection process without inserting a citation into the | |
59536 | 1794 buffer. |
25829 | 1795 |
1796 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
1797 | |
1798 @item g | |
1799 Start over with a new regular expression. The full database will be | |
59536 | 1800 rescanned with the new expression (see also @kbd{r}). |
25829 | 1801 |
1802 @c FIXME: Should we use something else here? r is usually rescan! | |
1803 @item r | |
1804 Refine the current selection with another regular expression. This will | |
1805 @emph{not} rescan the entire database, but just the already selected | |
59536 | 1806 entries. |
25829 | 1807 |
1808 @end table | |
1809 | |
1810 @vindex reftex-select-bib-map | |
1811 In order to define additional commands for this selection process, the | |
59536 | 1812 keymap @code{reftex-select-bib-map} may be used. |
25829 | 1813 |
1814 @node Citation Styles, Citation Info, Creating Citations, Citations | |
1815 @section Citation Styles | |
1816 @cindex Citation styles | |
1817 @cindex Citation styles, @code{natbib} | |
1818 @cindex Citation styles, @code{harvard} | |
1819 @cindex Citation styles, @code{chicago} | |
1820 @cindex @code{natbib}, citation style | |
1821 @cindex @code{harvard}, citation style | |
1822 @cindex @code{chicago}, citation style | |
1823 | |
1824 @vindex reftex-cite-format | |
1825 The standard LaTeX macro @code{\cite} works well with numeric or simple | |
1826 key citations. To deal with the more complex task of author-year | |
1827 citations as used in many natural sciences, a variety of packages has | |
1828 been developed which define derived forms of the @code{\cite} macro. | |
1829 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to produce these citation macros as well by | |
1830 setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. For the most commonly | |
1831 used packages (@code{natbib}, @code{harvard}, @code{chicago}) this may | |
1832 be done from the menu, under @code{Ref->Citation Styles}. Since there | |
1833 are usually several macros to create the citations, executing | |
1834 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-c [}) starts by prompting for the correct | |
1835 macro. For the Natbib style, this looks like this: | |
1836 | |
1837 @example | |
1838 SELECT A CITATION FORMAT | |
1839 | |
1840 [^M] \cite@{%l@} | |
1841 [t] \citet@{%l@} | |
1842 [T] \citet*@{%l@} | |
1843 [p] \citep@{%l@} | |
1844 [P] \citep*@{%l@} | |
1845 [e] \citep[e.g.][]@{%l@} | |
1846 [s] \citep[see][]@{%l@} | |
1847 [a] \citeauthor@{%l@} | |
1848 [A] \citeauthor*@{%l@} | |
1849 [y] \citeyear@{%l@} | |
1850 @end example | |
1851 | |
59536 | 1852 @vindex reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args |
1853 If cite formats contain empty paris of square brackets, RefTeX can | |
1854 will prompt for values of these optional arguments if you call the | |
1855 @code{reftex-citation} command with a @kbd{C-u} prefix. | |
25829 | 1856 Following the most generic of these packages, @code{natbib}, the builtin |
1857 citation packages always accept the @kbd{t} key for a @emph{textual} | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1858 citation (like: @code{Jones et al. (1997) have shown...}) as well as |
25829 | 1859 the @kbd{p} key for a parenthetical citation (like: @code{As shown |
59536 | 1860 earlier (Jones et al, 1997)}). |
25829 | 1861 |
1862 To make one of these styles the default, customize the variable | |
1863 @code{reftex-cite-format} or put into @file{.emacs}: | |
1864 | |
1865 @lisp | |
1866 (setq reftex-cite-format 'natbib) | |
1867 @end lisp | |
1868 | |
1869 You can also use AUCTeX style files to automatically set the | |
1870 citation style based on the @code{usepackage} commands in a given | |
1871 document. @xref{Style Files}, for information on how to set up the style | |
59536 | 1872 files correctly. |
25829 | 1873 |
1874 @node Citation Info, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citation Styles, Citations, Top | |
1875 @section Citation Info | |
1876 @cindex Displaying citations | |
1877 @cindex Citations, displaying | |
1878 @cindex Citation info | |
1879 @cindex Viewing citations | |
1880 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1881 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 1882 @findex reftex-view-crossref |
1883 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1884 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1885 When point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1886 argument of a @code{\cite} macro, the echo area will display some |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1887 information about the article cited there. Note that the information is |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1888 only displayed if the echo area is not occupied by a different message. |
25829 | 1889 |
1890 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database | |
1891 entry corresponding to a @code{\cite} macro, or all citation locations | |
1892 corresponding to a @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database entry. | |
59536 | 1893 @xref{Viewing Cross-References}. |
25829 | 1894 |
1895 @node Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations Outside LaTeX, Citation Info, Citations | |
1896 @section Chapterbib and Bibunits | |
1897 @cindex @code{chapterbib}, LaTeX package | |
1898 @cindex @code{bibunits}, LaTeX package | |
1899 @cindex Bibliographies, multiple | |
1900 | |
1901 @code{chapterbib} and @code{bibunits} are two LaTeX packages which | |
1902 produce multiple bibliographies in a document. This is no problem for | |
1903 @b{Ref@TeX{}} as long as all bibliographies use the same BibTeX database | |
1904 files. If they do not, it is best to have each document part in a | |
1905 separate file (as it is required for @code{chapterbib} anyway). Then | |
1906 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will still scan the locally relevant databases correctly. If | |
1907 you have multiple bibliographies within a @emph{single file}, this may | |
1908 or may not be the case. | |
1909 | |
59536 | 1910 @node Citations Outside LaTeX, BibTeX Database Subsets, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations |
25829 | 1911 @section Citations outside LaTeX |
1912 @cindex Citations outside LaTeX | |
1913 @vindex reftex-default-bibliography | |
1914 | |
1915 The command @code{reftex-citation} can also be executed outside a LaTeX | |
1916 buffer. This can be useful to reference articles in the mail buffer and | |
1917 other documents. You should @emph{not} enter @code{reftex-mode} for | |
1918 this, just execute the command. The list of BibTeX files will in this | |
1919 case be taken from the variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
1920 Setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} to the symbol | |
1921 @code{locally} does a decent job of putting all relevant information | |
1922 about a citation directly into the buffer. Here is the lisp code to add | |
1923 the @kbd{C-c [} binding to the mail buffer. It also provides a local | |
59536 | 1924 binding for @code{reftex-cite-format}. |
25829 | 1925 |
1926 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1927 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1928 (lambda () (define-key mail-mode-map "\C-c[" |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1929 (lambda () (interactive) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1930 (require 'reftex) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1931 (let ((reftex-cite-format 'locally)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1932 (reftex-citation)))))) |
25829 | 1933 @end lisp |
1934 | |
59536 | 1935 @node BibTeX Database Subsets, , Citations Outside LaTeX, Citations |
1936 @section Database Subsets | |
1937 @cindex BibTeX database subsets | |
1938 @findex reftex-create-bibtex-file | |
1939 | |
1940 @b{Ref@TeX{}} offers two ways to create a new BibTeX database file. | |
1941 | |
1942 The first option produces a file which contains only the entries | |
1943 actually referenced in the current document. This can be useful if | |
1944 the database in only meant for a single document and you want to clean | |
1945 it of old and unused ballast. It can also be useful while writing a | |
1946 document together with collaborators, in order to avoid sending around | |
1947 the entire (possibly very large) database. To create the file, use | |
1948 @kbd{M-x reftex-create-bibtex-file}, also available from the menu | |
1949 under @code{Ref->Global Actions->Create Bibtex File}. The command will | |
1950 prompt for a BibTeX file name and write the extracted entries to that | |
1951 file. | |
1952 | |
1953 The second option makes use of the selection process started by the | |
1954 command @kbd{C-c [} (@pxref{Creating Citations}). This command uses a | |
1955 regular expression to select entries, and lists them in a formatted | |
1956 selection buffer. After pressing the @kbd{e} key (mnemonics: Export), | |
1957 the command will prompt for the name of a new BibTeX file and write | |
1958 the selected entries to that file. You can also first mark some | |
1959 entries in the selection buffer with the @kbd{m} key and then export | |
1960 either the @i{marked} entries (with the @kbd{e} key) or the | |
1961 @i{unmarked} entries (with the @kbd{E} key). | |
1962 | |
25829 | 1963 @node Index Support, Viewing Cross-References, Citations, Top |
1964 @chapter Index Support | |
1965 @cindex Index Support | |
1966 @cindex @code{\index} | |
1967 | |
1968 LaTeX has builtin support for creating an Index. The LaTeX core | |
1969 supports two different indices, the standard index and a glossary. With | |
1970 the help of special LaTeX packages (@file{multind.sty} or | |
1971 @file{index.sty}), any number of indices can be supported. | |
1972 | |
1973 Index entries are created with the @code{\index@{@var{entry}@}} macro. | |
1974 All entries defined in a document are written out to the @file{.aux} | |
1975 file. A separate tool must be used to convert this information into a | |
1976 nicely formatted index. Tools used with LaTeX include @code{MakeIndex} | |
59536 | 1977 and @code{xindy}. |
25829 | 1978 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1979 Indexing is a very difficult task. It must follow strict conventions to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1980 make the index consistent and complete. There are basically two |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1981 approaches one can follow, and both have their merits. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1982 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1983 @enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1984 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1985 Part of the indexing should already be done with the markup. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1986 document structure should be reflected in the index, so when starting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1987 new sections, the basic topics of the section should be indexed. If the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1988 document contains definitions, theorems or the like, these should all |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1989 correspond to appropriate index entries. This part of the index can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1990 very well be developed along with the document. Often it is worthwhile |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1991 to define special purpose macros which define an item and at the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1992 time make an index entry, possibly with special formatting to make the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1993 reference page in the index bold or underlined. To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1994 support for indexing possible, these special macros must be added to |
59536 | 1995 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1996 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1997 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1998 The rest of the index is often just a collection of where in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1999 document certain words or phrases are being used. This part is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2000 difficult to develop along with the document, because consistent entries |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2001 for each occurrence are needed and are best selected when the document |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2002 is ready. @b{Ref@TeX{}} supports this with an @emph{index phrases file} |
59536 | 2003 which collects phrases and helps indexing the phrases globally. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2004 @end enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2005 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2006 Before you start, you need to make sure that @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2007 the index style being used in the current document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2008 builtin support for the default @code{\index} and @code{\glossary} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2009 macros. Other LaTeX packages, like the @file{multind} or @file{index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2010 package, redefine the @code{\index} macro to have an additional |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2011 argument, and @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured for those. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2012 sufficiently new version of AUCTeX (9.10c or later) will do this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2013 automatically. If you really don't use AUCTeX (you should!), this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2014 configuration needs to be done by hand with the menu (@code{Ref->Index |
59536 | 2015 Style}), or globally for all your documents with |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2016 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2017 @lisp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2018 (setq reftex-index-macros '(multind)) @r{or} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2019 (setq reftex-index-macros '(index)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2020 @end lisp |
25829 | 2021 |
2022 @menu | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2023 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2024 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2025 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 2026 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
2027 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
2028 @end menu | |
2029 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2030 @node Creating Index Entries, The Index Phrases File, , Index Support |
25829 | 2031 @section Creating Index Entries |
2032 @cindex Creating index entries | |
2033 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
2034 @kindex C-c < | |
2035 @findex reftex-index | |
2036 @kindex C-c / | |
2037 @findex reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
2038 | |
2039 In order to index the current selection or the word at the cursor press | |
2040 @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). This causes the | |
2041 selection or word @samp{@var{word}} to be replaced with | |
2042 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}}. The macro which is used | |
2043 (@code{\index} by default) can be configured with the variable | |
2044 @code{reftex-index-default-macro}. When the command is called with a | |
2045 prefix argument (@kbd{C-u C-c /}), you get a chance to edit the | |
2046 generated index entry. Use this to change the case of the word or to | |
2047 make the entry a subentry, for example by entering | |
2048 @samp{main!sub!@var{word}}. When called with two raw @kbd{C-u} prefixes | |
2049 (@kbd{C-u C-u C-c /}), you will be asked for the index macro as well. | |
2050 When there is nothing selected and no word at point, this command will | |
2051 just call @code{reftex-index}, described below. | |
2052 | |
2053 In order to create a general index entry, press @kbd{C-c <} | |
2054 (@code{reftex-index}). @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for one of the | |
2055 available index macros and for its arguments. Completion will be | |
2056 available for the index entry and, if applicable, the index tag. The | |
2057 index tag is a string identifying one of multiple indices. With the | |
2058 @file{multind} and @file{index} packages, this tag is the first argument | |
59536 | 2059 to the redefined @code{\index} macro. |
25829 | 2060 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2061 @node The Index Phrases File, Displaying and Editing the Index, Creating Index Entries, Index Support |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2062 @section The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2063 @cindex Index phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2064 @cindex Phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2065 @kindex C-c | |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2066 @findex reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2067 @cindex Macro definition lines, in phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2068 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2069 @b{Ref@TeX{}} maintains a file in which phrases can be collected for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2070 later indexing. The file is located in the same directory as the master |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2071 file of the document and has the extension @file{.rip} (@b{R}eftex |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2072 @b{I}ndex @b{P}hrases). You can create or visit the file with @kbd{C-c |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2073 |} (@code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer}). If the file is empty it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2074 is initialized by inserting a file header which contains the definition |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2075 of the available index macros. This list is initialized from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2076 @code{reftex-index-macros} (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). You can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2077 edit the header as needed, but if you define new LaTeX indexing macros, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2078 don't forget to add them to @code{reftex-index-macros} as well. Here is |
59536 | 2079 a phrase file header example: |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2080 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2081 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2082 % -*- mode: reftex-index-phrases -*- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2083 % Key Macro Format Repeat |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2084 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2085 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: i \index@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2086 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: I \index*@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2087 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: g \glossary@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2088 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: n \index*[name]@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2089 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2090 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2091 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2092 The macro definition lines consist of a unique letter identifying a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2093 macro, a format string and the @var{repeat} flag, all separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2094 @key{TAB}. The format string shows how the macro is to be applied, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2095 @samp{%s} will be replaced with the index entry. The repeat flag |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2096 indicates if @var{word} is indexed by the macro as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2097 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}} (@var{repeat} = @code{nil}) or as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2098 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}} (@var{repeat} = @code{t}). In the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2099 above example it is assumed that the macro @code{\index*@{@var{word}@}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2100 already typesets its argument in the text, so that it is unnecessary to |
59536 | 2101 repeat @var{word} outside the macro. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2102 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2103 @menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2104 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2105 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2106 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2107 @end menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2108 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2109 @node Collecting Phrases, Consistency Checks, , The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2110 @subsection Collecting Phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2111 @cindex Collecting index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2112 @cindex Index phrases, collection |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2113 @cindex Phrases, collecting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2114 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2115 Phrases for indexing can be collected while writing the document. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2116 command @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2117 copies the current selection (if active) or the word near point into the |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2118 phrases buffer. It then selects this buffer, so that the phrase line |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2119 can be edited. To return to the LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c C-c} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2120 (@code{reftex-index-phrases-save-and-return}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2121 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2122 You can also prepare the list of index phrases in a different way and |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2123 copy it into the phrases file. For example you might want to start from |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2124 a word list of the document and remove all words which should not be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2125 indexed. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2126 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2127 The phrase lines in the phrase buffer must have a specific format. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2128 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use font-lock to indicate if a line has the proper |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2129 format. A phrase line looks like this: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2130 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2131 @example |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2132 [@var{key}] <TABs> @var{phrase} [<TABs> @var{arg}[&&@var{arg}]... [ || @var{arg}]...] |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2133 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2134 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2135 @code{<TABs>} stands for white space containing at least one @key{TAB}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2136 @var{key} must be at the start of the line and is the character |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2137 identifying one of the macros defined in the file header. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2138 optional - when omitted, the first macro definition line in the file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2139 will be used for this phrase. The @var{phrase} is the phrase to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2140 searched for when indexing. It may contain several words separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2141 spaces. By default the search phrase is also the text entered as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2142 argument of the index macro. If you want the index entry to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2143 different from the search phrase, enter another @key{TAB} and the index |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2144 argument @var{arg}. If you want to have each match produce several |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2145 index entries, separate the different index arguments with @samp{ && |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2146 }@footnote{@samp{&&} with optional spaces, see |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2147 @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp}.}. If you want to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2148 able to choose at each match between several different index arguments, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2149 separate them with @samp{ || }@footnote{@samp{||} with optional spaces, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2150 see @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.}. Here is an |
59536 | 2151 example: |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2152 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2153 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2154 %-------------------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2155 I Sun |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2156 i Planet Planets |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2157 i Vega Stars!Vega |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2158 Jupiter Planets!Jupiter |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2159 i Mars Planets!Mars || Gods!Mars || Chocolate Bars!Mars |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2160 i Pluto Planets!Pluto && Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2161 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2162 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2163 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2164 So @samp{Sun} will be indexed directly as @samp{\index*@{Sun@}}, while |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2165 @samp{Planet} will be indexed as @samp{\index@{Planets@}Planet}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2166 @samp{Vega} will be indexed as a subitem of @samp{Stars}. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2167 @samp{Jupiter} line will also use the @samp{i} macro as it was the first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2168 macro definition in the file header (see above example). At each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2169 occurrence of @samp{Mars} you will be able choose between indexing it as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2170 a subitem of @samp{Planets}, @samp{Gods} or @samp{Chocolate Bars}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2171 Finally, every occurrence of @samp{Pluto} will be indexed as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2172 @samp{\index@{Planets!Pluto@}\index@{Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto@}Pluto} |
59536 | 2173 and will therefore create two different index entries. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2174 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2175 @node Consistency Checks, Global Indexing, Collecting Phrases, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2176 @subsection Consistency Checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2177 @cindex Index phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2178 @cindex Phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2179 @cindex Consistency check for index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2180 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2181 @kindex C-c C-s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2182 Before indexing the phrases in the phrases buffer, they should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2183 checked carefully for consistency. A first step is to sort the phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2184 alphabetically - this is done with the command @kbd{C-c C-s} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2185 (@code{reftex-index-sort-phrases}). It will sort all phrases in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2186 buffer alphabetically by search phrase. If you want to group certain |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2187 phrases and only sort within the groups, insert empty lines between the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2188 groups. Sorting will only change the sequence of phrases within each |
59536 | 2189 group (see the variable @code{reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks}). |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2190 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2191 @kindex C-c C-i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2192 A useful command is @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{reftex-index-phrases-info}) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2193 which lists information about the phrase at point, including an example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2194 of how the index entry will look like and the number of expected matches |
59536 | 2195 in the document. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2196 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2197 @kindex C-c C-t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2198 Another important check is to find out if there are double or |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2199 overlapping entries in the buffer. For example if you are first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2200 searching and indexing @samp{Mars} and then @samp{Planet Mars}, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2201 second phrase will not match because of the index macro inserted before |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2202 @samp{Mars} earlier. The command @kbd{C-c C-t} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2203 (@code{reftex-index-find-next-conflict-phrase}) finds the next phrase in |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2204 the buffer which is either duplicate or a subphrase of another phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2205 In order to check the whole buffer like this, start at the beginning and |
59536 | 2206 execute this command repeatedly. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2207 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2208 @node Global Indexing, , Consistency Checks, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2209 @subsection Global Indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2210 @cindex Global indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2211 @cindex Indexing, global |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2212 @cindex Indexing, from @file{phrases} buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2213 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2214 Once the index phrases have been collected and organized, you are set |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2215 for global indexing. I recommend to do this only on an otherwise |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2216 finished document. Global indexing starts from the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2217 There are several commands which start indexing: @kbd{C-c C-x} acts on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2218 the current phrase line, @kbd{C-c C-r} on all lines in the current |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2219 region and @kbd{C-c C-a} on all phrase lines in the buffer. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2220 probably good to do indexing in small chunks since your concentration |
59536 | 2221 may not last long enough to do everything in one go. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2222 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2223 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will start at the first phrase line and search the phrase |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2224 globally in the whole document. At each match it will stop, compute the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2225 replacement string and offer you the following choices@footnote{Windows |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2226 users: Restrict yourself to the described keys during indexing. Pressing |
59536 | 2227 @key{Help} at the indexing prompt can apparently hang Emacs.}: |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2228 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2229 @table @kbd |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2230 @item y |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2231 Replace this match with the proposed string. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2232 @item n |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2233 Skip this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2234 @item ! |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2235 Replace this and all further matches in this file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2236 @item q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2237 Skip this match, start with next file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2238 @item Q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2239 Skip this match, start with next phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2240 @item o |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2241 Select a different indexing macro for this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2242 @item 1-9 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2243 Select one of multiple index keys (those separated with @samp{||}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2244 @item e |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2245 Edit the replacement text. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2246 @item C-r |
40705 | 2247 Recursive edit. Use @kbd{C-M-c} to return to the indexing process. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2248 @item s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2249 Save this buffer and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2250 @item S |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2251 Save all document buffers and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2252 @item C-g |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2253 Abort the indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2254 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2255 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2256 The @samp{Find and Index in Document} menu in the phrases buffer also |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2257 lists a few options for the indexing process. The options have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2258 associated customization variables to set the defaults (@pxref{Options |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2259 (Index Support)}). Here is a short explanation of what the options do: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2260 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2261 @table @i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2262 @item Match Whole Words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2263 When searching for index phrases, make sure whole words are matched. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2264 This should probably always be on. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2265 @item Case Sensitive Search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2266 Search case sensitively for phrases. I recommend to have this setting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2267 off, in order to match the capitalized words at the beginning of a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2268 sentence, and even typos. You can always say @emph{no} at a match you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2269 do not like. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2270 @item Wrap Long Lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2271 Inserting index macros increases the line length. Turn this option on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2272 to allow @b{Ref@TeX{}} to wrap long lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2273 @item Skip Indexed Matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2274 When this is on, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will at each match try to figure out if |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2275 this match is already indexed. A match is considered indexed if it is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2276 either the argument of an index macro, or if an index macro is directly |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2277 (without whitespace separation) before or after the match. Index macros |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2278 are those configured in @code{reftex-index-macros}. Intended for |
59536 | 2279 re-indexing a documents after changes have been made. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2280 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2281 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2282 Even though indexing should be the last thing you do to a document, you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2283 are bound to make changes afterwards. Indexing then has to be applied |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2284 to the changed regions. The command |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2285 @code{reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region} is designed for this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2286 purpose. When called from a LaTeX document with active region, it will |
59536 | 2287 apply @code{reftex-index-all-phrases} to the current region. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2288 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2289 @node Displaying and Editing the Index, Builtin Index Macros, The Index Phrases File, Index Support |
25829 | 2290 @section Displaying and Editing the Index |
2291 @cindex Displaying the Index | |
2292 @cindex Editing the Index | |
2293 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
2294 @cindex Index, displaying | |
2295 @cindex Index, editing | |
2296 @kindex C-c > | |
2297 @findex reftex-display-index | |
2298 | |
2299 In order to compile and display the index, press @kbd{C-c >}. If the | |
2300 document uses multiple indices, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask you to select | |
2301 one. Then, all index entries will be sorted alphabetically and | |
2302 displayed in a special buffer, the @file{*Index*} buffer. From that | |
59536 | 2303 buffer you can check and edit each entry. |
25829 | 2304 |
2305 The index can be restricted to the current section or the region. Then | |
2306 only entries in that part of the document will go into the compiled | |
2307 index. To restrict to the current section, use a numeric prefix | |
2308 @samp{2}, thus press @kbd{C-u 2 C-c >}. To restrict to the current | |
2309 region, make the region active and use a numeric prefix @samp{3} (press | |
2310 @kbd{C-u 3 C-c >}). From within the @file{*Index*} buffer the | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2311 restriction can be moved from one section to the next by pressing the |
59536 | 2312 @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} keys. |
25829 | 2313 |
2314 One caveat: @b{Ref@TeX{}} finds the definition point of an index entry | |
2315 by searching near the buffer position where it had found to macro during | |
2316 scanning. If you have several identical index entries in the same | |
2317 buffer and significant changes have shifted the entries around, you must | |
2318 rescan the buffer to ensure the correspondence between the | |
2319 @file{*Index*} buffer and the definition locations. It is therefore | |
2320 advisable to rescan the document (with @kbd{r} or @kbd{C-u r}) | |
2321 frequently while editing the index from the @file{*Index*} | |
59536 | 2322 buffer. |
25829 | 2323 |
2324 @kindex ? | |
2325 Here is a list of special commands available in the @file{*Index*} buffer. A | |
2326 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
59536 | 2327 @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 2328 |
2329 @table @kbd | |
2330 @tablesubheading{General} | |
2331 @item ? | |
2332 Display a summary of commands. | |
2333 | |
2334 @item 0-9, - | |
2335 Prefix argument. | |
2336 | |
2337 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
2338 @item ! A..Z | |
2339 Pressing any capital letter will jump to the corresponding section in | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2340 the @file{*Index*} buffer. The exclamation mark is special and jumps to |
25829 | 2341 the first entries alphabetically sorted below @samp{A}. These are |
59536 | 2342 usually non-alphanumeric characters. |
25829 | 2343 @item n |
59536 | 2344 Go to next entry. |
25829 | 2345 @item p |
59536 | 2346 Go to previous entry. |
25829 | 2347 |
2348 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} | |
2349 @item @key{SPC} | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2350 Show the place in the document where this index entry is defined. |
25829 | 2351 |
2352 @item @key{TAB} | |
2353 Go to the definition of the current index entry in another | |
59536 | 2354 window. |
25829 | 2355 |
2356 @item @key{RET} | |
2357 Go to the definition of the current index entry and hide the | |
59536 | 2358 @file{*Index*} buffer window. |
25829 | 2359 |
2360 @item f | |
2361 @vindex reftex-index-follow-mode | |
2362 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
2363 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
2364 always show the location corresponding to the line in the @file{*Index*} | |
2365 buffer at point. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
2366 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
2367 @code{reftex-index-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files | |
2368 already visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for | |
2369 follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
59536 | 2370 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. |
25829 | 2371 |
2372 @tablesubheading{Entry editing} | |
2373 @item e | |
2374 Edit the current index entry. In the minibuffer, you can edit the | |
59536 | 2375 index macro which defines this entry. |
25829 | 2376 |
2377 @item C-k | |
2378 Kill the index entry. Currently not implemented because I don't know | |
59536 | 2379 how to implement an @code{undo} function for this. |
25829 | 2380 |
2381 @item * | |
2382 Edit the @var{key} part of the entry. This is the initial part of the | |
59536 | 2383 entry which determines the location of the entry in the index. |
25829 | 2384 |
2385 @item | | |
2386 Edit the @var{attribute} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2387 vertical bar. With @code{MakeIndex}, this part is an encapsulating | |
2388 macro. With @code{xindy}, it is called @emph{attribute} and is a | |
2389 property of the index entry that can lead to special formatting. When | |
2390 called with @kbd{C-u} prefix, kill the entire @var{attribute} | |
59536 | 2391 part. |
25829 | 2392 |
2393 @item @@ | |
2394 Edit the @var{visual} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2395 @samp{@@} which is used by @code{MakeIndex} to change the visual | |
2396 appearance of the entry in the index. When called with @kbd{C-u} | |
59536 | 2397 prefix, kill the entire @var{visual} part. |
25829 | 2398 |
2399 @item ( | |
2400 Toggle the beginning of page range property @samp{|(} of the | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2401 entry. |
25829 | 2402 |
2403 @item ) | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2404 Toggle the end of page range property @samp{|)} of the entry. |
25829 | 2405 |
2406 @item _ | |
2407 Make the current entry a subentry. This command will prompt for the | |
59536 | 2408 superordinate entry and insert it. |
25829 | 2409 |
2410 @item ^ | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2411 Remove the highest superordinate entry. If the current entry is a |
25829 | 2412 subitem (@samp{aaa!bbb!ccc}), this function moves it up the hierarchy |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2413 (@samp{bbb!ccc}). |
25829 | 2414 |
2415 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
2416 @item q | |
59536 | 2417 Hide the @file{*Index*} buffer. |
25829 | 2418 |
2419 @item k | |
59536 | 2420 Kill the @file{*Index*} buffer. |
25829 | 2421 |
2422 @item C-c = | |
59536 | 2423 Switch to the Table of Contents buffer of this document. |
25829 | 2424 |
2425 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
2426 @item c | |
2427 @vindex reftex-index-include-context | |
2428 Toggle the display of short context in the @file{*Index*} buffer. The | |
2429 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
59536 | 2430 @code{reftex-index-include-context}. |
25829 | 2431 |
2432 @item @} | |
2433 Restrict the index to a single document section. The corresponding | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2434 section number will be displayed in the @code{R<>} indicator in the |
59536 | 2435 mode line and in the header of the @file{*Index*} buffer. |
25829 | 2436 |
2437 @item @{ | |
59536 | 2438 Widen the index to contain all entries of the document. |
25829 | 2439 |
2440 @item < | |
2441 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
59536 | 2442 previous section. |
25829 | 2443 |
2444 @item > | |
2445 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
59536 | 2446 next section. |
25829 | 2447 |
2448 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
2449 @item g | |
2450 Rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
2451 document. However, it sorts the entries again, so that edited entries | |
59536 | 2452 will move to the correct position. |
25829 | 2453 |
2454 @item r | |
2455 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2456 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. When | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2457 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-@code{nil}, rescan only the file this |
59536 | 2458 location is defined in, not the entire document. |
25829 | 2459 |
2460 @item C-u r | |
2461 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} | |
59536 | 2462 buffer. |
25829 | 2463 |
2464 @item s | |
2465 Switch to a different index (for documents with multiple | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2466 indices). |
25829 | 2467 @end table |
2468 | |
2469 | |
2470 @node Builtin Index Macros, Defining Index Macros, Displaying and Editing the Index, Index Support | |
2471 @section Builtin Index Macros | |
2472 @cindex Builtin index macros | |
2473 @cindex Index macros, builtin | |
2474 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2475 @cindex @code{multind}, LaTeX package | |
2476 @cindex @code{index}, LaTeX package | |
2477 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{multind} | |
2478 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{index} | |
2479 | |
2480 @b{Ref@TeX{}} by default recognizes the @code{\index} and | |
2481 @code{\glossary} macros which are defined in the LaTeX core. It has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2482 also builtin support for the re-implementations of @code{\index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2483 in the @file{multind} and @file{index} packages. However, since |
25829 | 2484 the different definitions of the @code{\index} macro are incompatible, |
2485 you will have to explicitly specify the index style used. | |
2486 @xref{Creating Index Entries}, for information on how to do that. | |
2487 | |
2488 @node Defining Index Macros, , Builtin Index Macros, Index Support | |
2489 @section Defining Index Macros | |
2490 @cindex Defining Index Macros | |
2491 @cindex Index macros, defining | |
2492 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2493 | |
2494 When writing a document with an index you will probably define | |
2495 additional macros which make entries into the index. | |
2496 Let's look at an example. | |
2497 | |
2498 @example | |
2499 \newcommand@{\ix@}[1]@{#1\index@{#1@}@} | |
2500 \newcommand@{\nindex@}[1]@{\textit@{#1@}\index[name]@{#1@}@} | |
2501 \newcommand@{\astobj@}[1]@{\index@{Astronomical Objects!#1@}@} | |
2502 @end example | |
2503 | |
2504 The first macro @code{\ix} typesets its argument in the text and places | |
2505 it into the index. The second macro @code{\nindex} typesets its | |
2506 argument in the text and places it into a separate index with the tag | |
2507 @samp{name}@footnote{We are using the syntax of the @file{index} package | |
2508 here.}. The last macro also places its argument into the index, but as | |
2509 subitems under the main index entry @samp{Astronomical Objects}. Here | |
2510 is how to make @b{Ref@TeX{}} recognize and correctly interpret these | |
2511 macros, first with Emacs Lisp. | |
2512 | |
2513 @lisp | |
2514 (setq reftex-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2515 '(("\\ix@{*@}" "idx" ?x "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2516 ("\\nindex@{*@}" "name" ?n "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2517 ("\\astobj@{*@}" "idx" ?o "Astronomical Objects!" nil t))) |
25829 | 2518 @end lisp |
2519 | |
2520 Note that the index tag is @samp{idx} for the main index, and | |
2521 @samp{name} for the name index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} are reserved | |
2522 for the default index and for the glossary. | |
2523 | |
2524 The character arguments @code{?x}, @code{?n}, and @code{?o} are for | |
2525 quick identification of these macros when @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts new | |
2526 index entries with @code{reftex-index}. These codes need to be | |
2527 unique. @code{?i}, @code{?I}, and @code{?g} are reserved for the | |
2528 @code{\index}, @code{\index*}, and @code{\glossary} macros, | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2529 respectively. |
25829 | 2530 |
2531 The following string is empty unless your macro adds a superordinate | |
2532 entry to the index key - this is the case for the @code{\astobj} macro. | |
2533 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2534 The next entry can be a hook function to exclude certain matches, it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2535 almost always can be @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2536 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2537 The final element in the list indicates if the text being indexed needs |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2538 to be repeated outside the macro. For the normal index macros, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2539 should be @code{t}. Only if the macro typesets the entry in the text |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2540 (like @code{\ix} and @code{\nindex} in the example do), this should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2541 @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2542 |
25829 | 2543 To do the same thing with customize, you need to fill in the templates |
2544 like this: | |
2545 | |
2546 @example | |
2547 Repeat: | |
2548 [INS] [DEL] List: | |
2549 Macro with args: \ix@{*@} | |
2550 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2551 Access Key : x | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2552 Key Prefix : |
25829 | 2553 Exclusion hook : nil |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2554 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2555 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2556 Macro with args: \nindex@{*@} | |
2557 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: name | |
2558 Access Key : n | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2559 Key Prefix : |
25829 | 2560 Exclusion hook : nil |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2561 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2562 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2563 Macro with args: \astobj@{*@} | |
2564 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2565 Access Key : o | |
2566 Key Prefix : Astronomical Objects! | |
2567 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2568 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] on (non-nil) |
25829 | 2569 [INS] |
2570 @end example | |
2571 | |
2572 With the macro @code{\ix} defined, you may want to change the default | |
2573 macro used for indexing a text phrase (@pxref{Creating Index Entries}). | |
2574 This would be done like this | |
2575 | |
2576 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2577 (setq reftex-index-default-macro '(?x "idx")) |
25829 | 2578 @end lisp |
2579 | |
2580 which specifies that the macro identified with the character @code{?x} (the | |
2581 @code{\ix} macro) should be used for indexing phrases and words already | |
2582 in the buffer with @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). | |
59536 | 2583 The index tag is "idx". |
25829 | 2584 |
2585 @node Viewing Cross-References, RefTeXs Menu, Index Support, Top | |
2586 @chapter Viewing Cross--References | |
2587 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
2588 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
2589 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2590 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 2591 |
2592 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display cross--referencing information. This means, | |
2593 if two document locations are linked, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display the | |
2594 matching location(s) in another window. The @code{\label} and @code{\ref} | |
2595 macros are one way of establishing such a link. Also, a @code{\cite} | |
2596 macro is linked to the corresponding @code{\bibitem} macro or a BibTeX | |
59536 | 2597 database entry. |
25829 | 2598 |
2599 The feature is invoked by pressing @kbd{C-c &} | |
2600 (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) while point is on the @var{key} argument | |
2601 of a macro involved in cross--referencing. You can also click with | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2602 @kbd{S-mouse-2} on the macro argument. Here is what will happen for |
59536 | 2603 individual classes of macros: |
25829 | 2604 |
2605 @table @asis | |
2606 | |
2607 @item @code{\ref} | |
2608 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
2609 Display the corresponding label definition. All usual | |
2610 variants@footnote{all macros that start with @samp{ref} or end with | |
2611 @samp{ref} or @samp{refrange}} of the @code{\ref} macro are active for | |
2612 cross--reference display. This works also for labels defined in an | |
2613 external document when the current document refers to them through the | |
59536 | 2614 @code{xr} interface (@pxref{xr (LaTeX package)}). |
25829 | 2615 |
2616 @item @code{\label} | |
2617 @cindex @code{\label} | |
2618 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
2619 Display a document location which references this label. Pressing | |
2620 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
2621 all locations. Not only the @code{\label} macro but also other macros | |
2622 with label arguments (as configured with @code{reftex-label-alist}) are | |
59536 | 2623 active for cross--reference display. |
25829 | 2624 |
2625 @item @code{\cite} | |
2626 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
2627 Display the corresponding BibTeX database entry or @code{\bibitem}. | |
2628 All usual variants@footnote{all macros that either start or end with | |
2629 @samp{cite}} of the @code{\cite} macro are active for cross--reference | |
59536 | 2630 display. |
25829 | 2631 |
2632 @item @code{\bibitem} | |
2633 @cindex @code{\bibitem} | |
2634 Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing | |
2635 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
59536 | 2636 all locations. |
25829 | 2637 |
2638 @item BibTeX | |
2639 @cindex BibTeX buffer, viewing cite locations from | |
2640 @cindex Viewing cite locations from BibTeX buffer | |
2641 @kbd{C-c &} is also active in BibTeX buffers. All locations in a | |
2642 document where the database entry at point is cited will be displayed. | |
2643 On first use, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a buffer which belongs to | |
2644 the document you want to search. Subsequent calls will use the same | |
2645 document, until you break this link with a prefix argument to @kbd{C-c | |
59536 | 2646 &}. |
25829 | 2647 |
2648 @item @code{\index} | |
2649 @cindex @code{\index} | |
2650 Display other locations in the document which are marked by an index | |
2651 macro with the same key argument. Along with the standard @code{\index} | |
2652 and @code{\glossary} macros, all macros configured in | |
59536 | 2653 @code{reftex-index-macros} will be recognized. |
25829 | 2654 @end table |
2655 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2656 @vindex reftex-view-crossref-extra |
25829 | 2657 While the display of cross referencing information for the above |
2658 mentioned macros is hard--coded, you can configure additional relations | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2659 in the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}. |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2660 |
25829 | 2661 @iftex |
2662 @chapter All the Rest | |
2663 @end iftex | |
2664 | |
39267 | 2665 @node RefTeXs Menu, Key Bindings, Viewing Cross-References, Top |
25829 | 2666 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s Menu |
2667 @cindex RefTeXs Menu | |
2668 @cindex Menu, in the menu bar | |
2669 | |
2670 @b{Ref@TeX{}} installs a @code{Ref} menu in the menu bar on systems | |
2671 which support this. From this menu you can access all of | |
2672 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands and a few of its options. There is also a | |
2673 @code{Customize} submenu which can be used to access @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
59536 | 2674 entire set of options. |
25829 | 2675 |
39267 | 2676 @node Key Bindings, Faces, RefTeXs Menu, Top |
2677 @section Default Key Bindings | |
2678 @cindex Key Bindings, summary | |
2679 | |
2680 Here is a summary of the available key bindings. | |
25829 | 2681 |
2682 @kindex C-c = | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2683 @kindex C-c - |
25829 | 2684 @kindex C-c ( |
2685 @kindex C-c ) | |
2686 @kindex C-c [ | |
2687 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2688 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 2689 @kindex C-c / |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2690 @kindex C-c \ |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2691 @kindex C-c | |
25829 | 2692 @kindex C-c < |
2693 @kindex C-c > | |
2694 @example | |
2695 @kbd{C-c =} @code{reftex-toc} | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2696 @kbd{C-c -} @code{reftex-toc-recenter} |
25829 | 2697 @kbd{C-c (} @code{reftex-label} |
2698 @kbd{C-c )} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2699 @kbd{C-c [} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2700 @kbd{C-c &} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2701 @kbd{S-mouse-2} @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} |
25829 | 2702 @kbd{C-c /} @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2703 @kbd{C-c \} @code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2704 @kbd{C-c |} @code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer} |
25829 | 2705 @kbd{C-c <} @code{reftex-index} |
2706 @kbd{C-c >} @code{reftex-display-index} | |
2707 @end example | |
2708 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2709 Note that the @kbd{S-mouse-2} binding is only provided if this key is |
25829 | 2710 not already used by some other package. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not override an |
59536 | 2711 existing binding to @kbd{S-mouse-2}. |
25829 | 2712 |
2713 Personally, I also bind some functions in the users @kbd{C-c} map for | |
59536 | 2714 easier access. |
25829 | 2715 |
2716 @c FIXME: Do we need bindings for the Index macros here as well? | |
2717 @c C-c i C-c I or so???? | |
39267 | 2718 @c How about key bindings for reftex-reset-mode and reftex-parse-document? |
25829 | 2719 @kindex C-c t |
2720 @kindex C-c l | |
2721 @kindex C-c r | |
2722 @kindex C-c c | |
2723 @kindex C-c v | |
2724 @kindex C-c s | |
2725 @kindex C-c g | |
2726 @example | |
2727 @kbd{C-c t} @code{reftex-toc} | |
2728 @kbd{C-c l} @code{reftex-label} | |
2729 @kbd{C-c r} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2730 @kbd{C-c c} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2731 @kbd{C-c v} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
2732 @kbd{C-c s} @code{reftex-search-document} | |
2733 @kbd{C-c g} @code{reftex-grep-document} | |
2734 @end example | |
2735 | |
2736 @noindent These keys are reserved for the user, so I cannot bind them by | |
39267 | 2737 default. If you want to have these key bindings available, set in your |
25829 | 2738 @file{.emacs} file: |
2739 | |
2740 @vindex reftex-extra-bindings | |
2741 @lisp | |
2742 (setq reftex-extra-bindings t) | |
2743 @end lisp | |
2744 | |
2745 @vindex reftex-load-hook | |
39267 | 2746 Changing and adding to @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s key bindings is best done in the hook |
25829 | 2747 @code{reftex-load-hook}. For information on the keymaps |
2748 which should be used to add keys, see @ref{Keymaps and Hooks}. | |
2749 | |
39267 | 2750 @node Faces, AUCTeX, Key Bindings, Top |
25829 | 2751 @section Faces |
2752 @cindex Faces | |
2753 | |
2754 @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses faces when available to structure the selection and | |
2755 table of contents buffers. It does not create its own faces, but uses | |
2756 the ones defined in @file{font-lock.el}. Therefore, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
2757 use faces only when @code{font-lock} is loaded. This seems to be | |
2758 reasonable because people who like faces will very likely have it | |
2759 loaded. If you wish to turn off fontification or change the involved | |
59536 | 2760 faces, see @ref{Options (Fontification)}. |
25829 | 2761 |
2762 @node Multifile Documents, Language Support, AUCTeX, Top | |
2763 @section Multifile Documents | |
2764 @cindex Multifile documents | |
2765 @cindex Documents, spread over files | |
2766 | |
2767 The following is relevant when working with documents spread over many | |
59536 | 2768 files: |
25829 | 2769 |
2770 @itemize @bullet | |
2771 @item | |
2772 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has full support for multifile documents. You can edit parts of | |
2773 several (multifile) documents at the same time without conflicts. | |
2774 @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides functions to run @code{grep}, @code{search} and | |
2775 @code{query-replace} on all files which are part of a multifile | |
59536 | 2776 document. |
25829 | 2777 |
2778 @item | |
2779 @vindex tex-main-file | |
2780 @vindex TeX-master | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2781 All files belonging to a multifile document should define a File |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2782 Variable (@code{TeX-master} for AUCTeX or @code{tex-main-file} for the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2783 standard Emacs LaTeX mode) containing the name of the master file. For |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2784 example, to set the file variable @code{TeX-master}, include something |
59536 | 2785 like the following at the end of each TeX file: |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2786 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2787 @example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2788 %%% Local Variables: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2789 %%% mode:latex *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2790 %%% TeX-master: "thesis.tex" *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2791 %%% End: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2792 @end example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2793 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2794 AUCTeX with the setting |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2795 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2796 @lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2797 (setq-default TeX-master nil) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2798 @end lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2799 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2800 will actually ask you for each new file about the master file and insert |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2801 this comment automatically. For more details see the documentation of |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2802 the AUCTeX (@pxref{Multifile,,,auctex, The AUC TeX User Manual}), the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2803 documentation about the Emacs (La)TeX mode (@pxref{TeX Print,,,emacs, |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2804 The GNU Emacs Manual}) and the Emacs documentation on File Variables |
59536 | 2805 (@pxref{File Variables,,,emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). |
25829 | 2806 |
2807 @item | |
2808 The context of a label definition must be found in the same file as the | |
2809 label itself in order to be processed correctly by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The only | |
2810 exception is that section labels referring to a section statement | |
2811 outside the current file can still use that section title as | |
59536 | 2812 context. |
25829 | 2813 @end itemize |
2814 | |
2815 @node Language Support, Finding Files, Multifile Documents, Top | |
2816 @section Language Support | |
2817 @cindex Language support | |
2818 | |
2819 Some parts of @b{Ref@TeX{}} are language dependent. The default | |
2820 settings work well for English. If you are writing in a different | |
2821 language, the following hints may be useful: | |
2822 | |
2823 @itemize @bullet | |
2824 @item | |
2825 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
2826 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
2827 The mechanism to derive a label from context includes the abbreviation | |
2828 of words and omission of unimportant words. These mechanisms may have | |
2829 to be changed for other languages. See the variables | |
2830 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} and @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}. | |
2831 | |
2832 @item | |
2833 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
2834 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
2835 Also, when a label is derived from context, @b{Ref@TeX{}} clears the | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
2836 context string from non-ASCII characters in order to make a valid label. |
25829 | 2837 If there should ever be a version of @TeX{} which allows extended |
2838 characters @emph{in labels}, then we will have to look at the | |
2839 variables @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function} and | |
2840 @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}. | |
2841 | |
2842 @item | |
2843 When a label is referenced, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the word before point | |
2844 to guess which label type is required. These @emph{magic words} are | |
2845 different in every language. For an example of how to add magic words, | |
2846 see @ref{Adding Magic Words}. | |
2847 | |
2848 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
2849 @vindex reftex-cite-punctuation | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2850 @item |
25829 | 2851 @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts ``punctuation'' for multiple references and |
2852 for the author list in citations. Some of this may be language | |
2853 dependent. See the variables @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation} and | |
2854 @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
2855 @end itemize | |
2856 | |
2857 @node Finding Files, Optimizations, Language Support, Top | |
2858 @section Finding Files | |
2859 @cindex Finding files | |
2860 | |
2861 In order to find files included in a document via @code{\input} or | |
2862 @code{\include}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches all directories specified in the | |
2863 environment variable @code{TEXINPUTS}. Similarly, it will search the | |
2864 path specified in the variables @code{BIBINPUTS} and @code{TEXBIB} for | |
2865 BibTeX database files. | |
2866 | |
2867 When searching, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will also expand recursive path | |
2868 definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will | |
2869 only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these | |
2870 variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: | |
2871 | |
2872 @itemize @bullet | |
2873 @item | |
2874 Most TeX system have a default search path for both TeX files and BibTeX | |
2875 files which is defined in some setup file. Usually this default path is | |
2876 for system files which @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not need to see. But if your | |
2877 document needs TeX files or BibTeX database files in a directory only | |
2878 given in the default search path, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will fail to find them. | |
2879 @item | |
2880 Some TeX systems do not use environment variables at all in order to | |
2881 specify the search path. Both default and user search path are then | |
2882 defined in setup files. | |
2883 @end itemize | |
2884 | |
2885 @noindent | |
2886 There are three ways to solve this problem: | |
2887 | |
2888 @itemize @bullet | |
2889 @item | |
2890 Specify all relevant directories explicitly in the environment | |
2891 variables. If for some reason you don't want to mess with the default | |
2892 variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS}, define your own | |
2893 variables and configure @b{Ref@TeX{}} to use them instead: | |
2894 | |
2895 @lisp | |
2896 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables '("MYTEXINPUTS")) | |
2897 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables '("MYBIBINPUTS")) | |
2898 @end lisp | |
2899 | |
2900 @item | |
2901 Specify the full search path directly in @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s variables. | |
2902 | |
2903 @lisp | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2904 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables |
25829 | 2905 '("./inp:/home/cd/tex//:/usr/local/tex//")) |
2906 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
2907 '("/home/cd/tex/lit/")) | |
2908 @end lisp | |
2909 | |
2910 @item | |
2911 Some TeX systems provide stand--alone programs to do the file search just | |
2912 like TeX and BibTeX. E.g. Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the | |
2913 @code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich} | |
2914 to search for files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to use this | |
2915 program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich} | |
2916 command depends upon the version of that program. | |
2917 | |
2918 @lisp | |
2919 (setq reftex-use-external-file-finders t) | |
2920 (setq reftex-external-file-finders | |
37038
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
2921 '(("tex" . "kpsewhich -format=.tex %f") |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2922 ("bib" . "kpsewhich -format=.bib %f"))) |
25829 | 2923 @end lisp |
2924 @end itemize | |
2925 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2926 @cindex Noweb files |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2927 @vindex reftex-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2928 @vindex TeX-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2929 Some people like to use RefTeX with noweb files, which usually have the |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2930 extension @file{.nw}. In order to deal with such files, the new |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2931 extension must be added to the list of valid extensions in the variable |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2932 @code{reftex-file-extensions}. When working with AUCTeX as major mode, |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2933 the new extension must also be known to AUCTeX via the variable |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2934 @code{TeX-file-extension}. For example: |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2935 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2936 @lisp |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2937 (setq reftex-file-extensions |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2938 '(("nw" "tex" ".tex" ".ltx") ("bib" ".bib"))) |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2939 (setq TeX-file-extensions |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2940 '( "nw" "tex" "sty" "cls" "ltx" "texi" "texinfo")) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2941 @end lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2942 |
25829 | 2943 @node Optimizations, Problems and Work-Arounds, Finding Files, Top |
2944 @section Optimizations | |
2945 @cindex Optimizations | |
2946 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2947 @b{Note added 2002. Computers have gotten a lot faster, so most of the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2948 optimizations discussed below will not be necessary on new machines. I |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2949 am leaving this stuff in the manual for people who want to write thick |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2950 books, where some of it still might be useful.} |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2951 |
25829 | 2952 Implementing the principle of least surprises, the default settings of |
2953 @b{Ref@TeX{}} ensure a safe ride for beginners and casual users. However, | |
2954 when using @b{Ref@TeX{}} for a large project and/or on a small computer, | |
59536 | 2955 there are ways to improve speed or memory usage. |
25829 | 2956 |
2957 @itemize @bullet | |
2958 @item | |
2959 @b{Removing Lookup Buffers}@* | |
2960 @cindex Removing lookup buffers | |
2961 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load other parts of a multifile document as well as BibTeX | |
2962 database files for lookup purposes. These buffers are kept, so that | |
2963 subsequent use of the same files is fast. If you can't afford keeping | |
2964 these buffers around, and if you can live with a speed penalty, try | |
2965 | |
2966 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
2967 @lisp | |
2968 (setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers nil) | |
2969 @end lisp | |
2970 | |
2971 @item | |
2972 @b{Partial Document Scans}@* | |
2973 @cindex Partial documents scans | |
2974 @cindex Document scanning, partial | |
2975 A @kbd{C-u} prefix on the major @b{Ref@TeX{}} commands @code{reftex-label} | |
2976 (@kbd{C-u C-c (}), @code{reftex-reference} (@kbd{C-u C-c )}), | |
2977 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-u C-c [}), @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-u C-c | |
2978 =}), and @code{reftex-view-crossref} (@kbd{C-u C-c &}) initiates | |
2979 re-parsing of the entire document in order to update the parsing | |
2980 information. For a large document this can be unnecessary, in | |
2981 particular if only one file has changed. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured | |
2982 to do partial scans instead of full ones. @kbd{C-u} re-parsing then | |
2983 does apply only to the current buffer and files included from it. | |
2984 Likewise, the @kbd{r} key in both the label selection buffer and the | |
2985 table-of-contents buffer will only prompt scanning of the file in which | |
2986 the label or section macro near the cursor was defined. Re-parsing of | |
2987 the entire document is still available by using @kbd{C-u C-u} as a | |
2988 prefix, or the capital @kbd{R} key in the menus. To use this feature, | |
59536 | 2989 try |
25829 | 2990 |
2991 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2992 @lisp | |
2993 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
2994 @end lisp | |
2995 | |
2996 @item | |
2997 @b{Saving Parser Information}@* | |
2998 @cindex Saving parser information | |
2999 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
27195 | 3000 @vindex reftex-parse-file-extension |
25829 | 3001 Even with partial scans enabled, @b{Ref@TeX{}} still has to make one full |
3002 scan, when you start working with a document. To avoid this, parsing | |
3003 information can be stored in a file. The file @file{MASTER.rel} is used | |
3004 for storing information about a document with master file | |
3005 @file{MASTER.tex}. It is written automatically when you kill a buffer | |
3006 in @code{reftex-mode} or when you exit Emacs. The information is | |
3007 restored when you begin working with a document in a new editing | |
59536 | 3008 session. To use this feature, put into @file{.emacs}: |
25829 | 3009 |
3010 @vindex reftex-save-parse-info | |
3011 @lisp | |
3012 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
3013 @end lisp | |
3014 | |
3015 @item | |
59536 | 3016 @b{Identifying label types by prefix}@* |
3017 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
3018 @vindex reftex-trust-label-prefix | |
3019 @b{Ref@TeX{}} normally parses around each label to check in which | |
3020 environment this label is located, in order to assign a label type to | |
3021 the label. If your document contains thousands of labels, document | |
3022 parsing will take considerable time. If you have been using label prefixes | |
3023 like tab: and fn: consistently, you can tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to get the | |
3024 label type directly from the prefix, without additional parsing. This | |
3025 will be faster and also allow labels to end up in the correct category | |
3026 if for some reason it is not possible to derive the correct type from | |
3027 context. For example, to enable this feature for footnote and | |
3028 equation labels, use | |
3029 | |
3030 @lisp | |
3031 (setq reftex-trust-label-prefix '("fn:" "eq:")) | |
3032 @end lisp | |
3033 | |
3034 @item | |
25829 | 3035 @b{Automatic Document Scans}@* |
3036 @cindex Automatic document scans | |
3037 @cindex Document scanning, automatic | |
3038 At rare occasions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will automatically rescan a part of the | |
3039 document. If this gets into your way, it can be turned off with | |
3040 | |
3041 @vindex reftex-allow-automatic-rescan | |
3042 @lisp | |
3043 (setq reftex-allow-automatic-rescan nil) | |
3044 @end lisp | |
3045 | |
3046 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will then occasionally annotate new labels in the selection | |
3047 buffer, saying that their position in the label list in uncertain. A | |
59536 | 3048 manual document scan will fix this. |
25829 | 3049 |
3050 @item | |
3051 @b{Multiple Selection Buffers}@* | |
3052 @cindex Multiple selection buffers | |
3053 @cindex Selection buffers, multiple | |
3054 Normally, the selection buffer @file{*RefTeX Select*} is re-created for | |
3055 every selection process. In documents with very many labels this can | |
3056 take several seconds. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides an option to create a | |
3057 separate selection buffer for each label type and to keep this buffer | |
3058 from one selection to the next. These buffers are updated automatically | |
3059 only when a new label has been added in the buffers category with | |
3060 @code{reftex-label}. Updating the buffer takes as long as recreating it | |
3061 - so the time saving is limited to cases where no new labels of that | |
59536 | 3062 category have been added. To turn on this feature, use |
25829 | 3063 |
3064 @vindex reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
3065 @lisp | |
3066 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3067 @end lisp | |
3068 | |
3069 @noindent | |
3070 @cindex Selection buffers, updating | |
3071 You can also inhibit the automatic updating entirely. Then the | |
3072 selection buffer will always pop up very fast, but may not contain the | |
3073 most recently defined labels. You can always update the buffer by hand, | |
59536 | 3074 with the @kbd{g} key. To get this behavior, use instead |
25829 | 3075 |
3076 @vindex reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
3077 @lisp | |
3078 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t | |
3079 reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers nil) | |
3080 @end lisp | |
3081 @end itemize | |
3082 | |
3083 @need 2000 | |
3084 @noindent | |
3085 @b{As a summary}, here are the settings I recommend for heavy use of | |
3086 @b{Ref@TeX{}} with large documents: | |
3087 | |
3088 @lisp | |
3089 @group | |
3090 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t | |
3091 reftex-save-parse-info t | |
3092 reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3093 @end group | |
3094 @end lisp | |
3095 | |
3096 @node AUCTeX, Multifile Documents, Faces, Top | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3097 @section AUC@TeX{} |
25829 | 3098 @cindex @code{AUCTeX}, Emacs package |
3099 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{AUCTeX} | |
3100 | |
3101 AUCTeX is without doubt the best major mode for editing TeX and LaTeX | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3102 files with Emacs (@pxref{Top,AUCTeX,,auctex, The AUCTeX User Manual}). |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3103 If AUCTeX is not part of your Emacs distribution, you can get |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3104 it@footnote{XEmacs 21.x users may want to install the corresponding |
59536 | 3105 XEmacs package.} by ftp from the @value{AUCTEXSITE}. |
25829 | 3106 |
3107 @menu | |
3108 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
3109 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
3110 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
3111 @end menu | |
3112 | |
3113 @node AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, Style Files, , AUCTeX | |
3114 @subsection The AUC@TeX{}-@b{Ref@TeX{}} Interface | |
3115 | |
3116 @b{Ref@TeX{}} contains code to interface with AUCTeX. When this | |
3117 interface is turned on, both packages will interact closely. Instead of | |
3118 using @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands directly, you can then also use them | |
3119 indirectly as part of the AUCTeX | |
3120 environment@footnote{@b{Ref@TeX{}} 4.0 and AUCTeX 9.10c will be | |
3121 needed for all of this to work. Parts of it work also with earlier | |
59536 | 3122 versions.}. The interface is turned on with |
25829 | 3123 |
3124 @lisp | |
3125 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
3126 @end lisp | |
3127 | |
3128 If you need finer control about which parts of the interface are used | |
3129 and which not, read the docstring of the variable | |
3130 @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} or customize it with @kbd{M-x | |
3131 customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX @key{RET}}. | |
3132 | |
3133 The following list describes the individual parts of the interface. | |
3134 | |
3135 @itemize @bullet | |
3136 @item | |
3137 @findex reftex-label | |
3138 @vindex LaTeX-label-function, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3139 @kindex C-c C-e | |
3140 @kindex C-c C-s | |
3141 @findex LaTeX-section, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3142 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3143 @b{AUCTeX calls @code{reftex-label} to insert labels}@* | |
3144 When a new section is created with @kbd{C-c C-s}, or a new environment | |
3145 is inserted with @kbd{C-c C-e}, AUCTeX normally prompts for a label to | |
3146 go with it. With the interface, @code{reftex-label} is called instead. | |
3147 For example, if you type @kbd{C-c C-e equation @key{RET}}, AUCTeX and | |
3148 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will insert | |
3149 | |
3150 @example | |
3151 \begin@{equation@} | |
3152 \label@{eq:1@} | |
3153 | |
3154 \end@{equation@} | |
3155 @end example | |
3156 | |
3157 @noindent | |
3158 without further prompts. | |
3159 | |
3160 Similarly, when you type @kbd{C-c C-s section @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3161 will offer its default label which is derived from the section title. | |
3162 | |
3163 @item | |
3164 @b{AUCTeX tells @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections}@* | |
3165 When creating a new section with @kbd{C-c C-s}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not | |
59536 | 3166 have to rescan the buffer in order to see it. |
25829 | 3167 |
3168 @item | |
3169 @findex reftex-arg-label | |
3170 @findex TeX-arg-label, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3171 @findex reftex-arg-ref | |
3172 @findex TeX-arg-ref, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3173 @findex reftex-arg-cite | |
3174 @findex TeX-arg-cite, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3175 @findex reftex-arg-index | |
3176 @findex TeX-arg-index, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3177 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3178 @kindex C-c @key{RET} | |
3179 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} supplies macro arguments}@* When you insert a macro | |
3180 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}, AUCTeX normally prompts for | |
3181 macro arguments. Internally, it uses the functions | |
3182 @code{TeX-arg-label}, @code{TeX-arg-cite}, and @code{TeX-arg-index} to | |
3183 prompt for arguments which are labels, citation keys and index entries. | |
3184 The interface takes over these functions@footnote{@code{fset} is used to | |
3185 do this, which is not reversible. However, @b{Ref@TeX{}} implements the | |
3186 old functionality when you later decide to turn off the interface.} and | |
3187 supplies the macro arguments with @b{Ref@TeX{}'s} mechanisms. For | |
3188 example, when you type @kbd{C-c @key{RET} ref @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3189 will supply its label selection process (@pxref{Referencing | |
59536 | 3190 Labels}). |
25829 | 3191 |
3192 @item | |
3193 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} tells AUCTeX about new labels, citation-- and index keys}@* | |
3194 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will add all newly created labels to AUCTeX's completion list. | |
3195 @end itemize | |
3196 | |
3197 @node Style Files, Bib-Cite, AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, AUCTeX | |
3198 @subsection Style Files | |
3199 @cindex Style files, AUCTeX | |
3200 @findex TeX-add-style-hook, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3201 Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by AUCTeX in | |
3202 association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3203 commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3204 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in such a style file is useful when the LaTeX style |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3205 defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3206 index. Many style files (e.g. @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3207 distributed with AUCTeX already support @b{Ref@TeX{}} in this |
59536 | 3208 way. |
25829 | 3209 |
3210 Before calling a @b{Ref@TeX{}} function, the style hook should always | |
3211 test for the availability of the function, so that the style file will | |
59536 | 3212 also work for people who do not use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. |
25829 | 3213 |
3214 Additions made with style files in the way described below remain local | |
3215 to the current document. For example, if one package uses AMSTeX, the | |
3216 style file will make @b{Ref@TeX{}} switch over to @code{\eqref}, but | |
59536 | 3217 this will not affect other documents. |
25829 | 3218 |
3219 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3220 @findex reftex-add-to-label-alist | |
3221 A style hook may contain calls to | |
3222 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}@footnote{This used to be the | |
3223 function @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} which is still available as an | |
3224 alias for compatibility.} which defines additions to | |
3225 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The argument taken by this function must have | |
3226 the same format as @code{reftex-label-alist}. The @file{amsmath.el} | |
59536 | 3227 style file of AUCTeX for example contains the following: |
25829 | 3228 |
3229 @lisp | |
3230 @group | |
3231 (TeX-add-style-hook "amsmath" | |
3232 (lambda () | |
3233 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3234 (reftex-add-label-environments '(AMSTeX))))) | |
3235 @end group | |
3236 @end lisp | |
3237 | |
3238 @noindent | |
3239 @findex LaTeX-add-environments, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3240 while a package @code{myprop} defining a @code{proposition} environment | |
59536 | 3241 with @code{\newtheorem} might use |
25829 | 3242 |
3243 @lisp | |
3244 @group | |
3245 (TeX-add-style-hook "myprop" | |
3246 (lambda () | |
3247 (LaTeX-add-environments '("proposition" LaTeX-env-label)) | |
3248 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3249 (reftex-add-label-environments | |
3250 '(("proposition" ?p "prop:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3251 ("Proposition" "Prop.") -3)))))) |
25829 | 3252 @end group |
3253 @end lisp | |
3254 | |
3255 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3256 Similarly, a style hook may contain a call to | |
3257 @code{reftex-set-cite-format} to set the citation format. The style | |
3258 file @file{natbib.el} for the Natbib citation style does switch | |
59536 | 3259 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s citation format like this: |
25829 | 3260 |
3261 @lisp | |
3262 (TeX-add-style-hook "natbib" | |
3263 (lambda () | |
3264 (if (fboundp 'reftex-set-cite-format) | |
3265 (reftex-set-cite-format 'natbib)))) | |
3266 @end lisp | |
3267 | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3268 @findex reftex-add-index-macros |
25829 | 3269 The hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} to |
3270 define additional @code{\index}-like macros. The argument must have | |
3271 the same format as @code{reftex-index-macros}. It may be a symbol, to | |
3272 trigger support for one of the builtin index packages. For example, | |
3273 the style @file{multind.el} contains | |
3274 | |
3275 @lisp | |
3276 (TeX-add-style-hook "multind" | |
3277 (lambda () | |
3278 (and (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3279 (reftex-add-index-macros '(multind))))) | |
3280 @end lisp | |
3281 | |
3282 If you have your own package @file{myindex} which defines the | |
3283 following macros to be used with the LaTeX @file{index.sty} file | |
3284 @example | |
3285 \newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}@} | |
3286 \newcommand@{\aindex@}[1]@{#1\index[author]@{#1@} | |
3287 @end example | |
3288 | |
3289 you could write this in the style file @file{myindex.el}: | |
3290 | |
3291 @lisp | |
3292 (TeX-add-style-hook "myindex" | |
3293 (lambda () | |
3294 (TeX-add-symbols | |
3295 '("molec" TeX-arg-index) | |
3296 '("aindex" TeX-arg-index)) | |
3297 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3298 (reftex-add-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3299 '(("molec@{*@}" "idx" ?m "Molecules!" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3300 ("aindex@{*@}" "author" ?a "" nil nil)))))) |
25829 | 3301 @end lisp |
3302 | |
3303 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3304 Finally the hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-section-levels} | |
3305 to define additional section statements. For example, the FoilTeX class | |
3306 has just two headers, @code{\foilhead} and @code{\rotatefoilhead}. Here | |
3307 is a style file @file{foils.el} that will inform @b{Ref@TeX{}} about these: | |
3308 | |
3309 @lisp | |
3310 (TeX-add-style-hook "foils" | |
3311 (lambda () | |
3312 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-section-levels) | |
3313 (reftex-add-section-levels '(("foilhead" . 3) | |
3314 ("rotatefoilhead" . 3)))))) | |
3315 @end lisp | |
3316 | |
3317 @node Bib-Cite, , Style Files, AUCTeX | |
3318 @subsection Bib-Cite | |
3319 @cindex @code{bib-cite}, Emacs package | |
3320 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{bib-cite} | |
3321 | |
3322 Once you have written a document with labels, references and citations, | |
3323 it can be nice to read it like a hypertext document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3324 support for that: @code{reftex-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{C-c |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3325 &}), @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{S-mouse-2}), and |
25829 | 3326 @code{reftex-search-document}. A somewhat fancier interface with mouse |
3327 highlighting is provided (among other things) by Peter S. Galbraith's | |
3328 @file{bib-cite.el}. There is some overlap in the functionalities of | |
3329 Bib-cite and @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Bib-cite.el comes bundled with | |
59536 | 3330 AUCTeX. |
25829 | 3331 |
3332 Bib-cite version 3.06 and later can be configured so that bib-cite's | |
3333 mouse functions use @b{Ref@TeX{}} for displaying references and citations. | |
3334 This can be useful in particular when working with the LaTeX @code{xr} | |
3335 package or with an explicit @code{thebibliography} environment (rather | |
3336 than BibTeX). Bib-cite cannot handle those, but @b{Ref@TeX{}} does. To | |
59536 | 3337 make use of this feature, try |
25829 | 3338 |
3339 @vindex bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref | |
3340 @lisp | |
3341 (setq bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref t) | |
3342 @end lisp | |
3343 | |
3344 @page | |
3345 @node Problems and Work-Arounds, Imprint, Optimizations, Top | |
3346 @section Problems and Work-arounds | |
3347 @cindex Problems and work-arounds | |
3348 | |
3349 @itemize @bullet | |
3350 @item | |
3351 @b{LaTeX commands}@* | |
3352 @cindex LaTeX commands, not found | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3353 @code{\input}, @code{\include}, and @code{\section} (etc.) statements |
59536 | 3354 have to be first on a line (except for white space). |
25829 | 3355 |
3356 @item | |
3357 @b{Commented regions}@* | |
3358 @cindex Labels, commented out | |
3359 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sees also labels in regions commented out and will refuse to | |
59536 | 3360 make duplicates of such labels. This is considered to be a feature. |
25829 | 3361 |
3362 @item | |
3363 @b{Wrong section numbers}@* | |
3364 @cindex Section numbers, wrong | |
3365 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
3366 When using partial scans (@code{reftex-enable-partial-scans}), the section | |
3367 numbers in the table of contents may eventually become wrong. A full | |
59536 | 3368 scan will fix this. |
25829 | 3369 |
3370 @item | |
3371 @b{Local settings}@* | |
3372 @cindex Settings, local | |
3373 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3374 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3375 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3376 The label environment definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist} are | |
3377 global and apply to all documents. If you need to make definitions | |
3378 local to a document, because they would interfere with settings in other | |
3379 documents, you should use AUCTeX and set up style files with calls to | |
3380 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}, @code{reftex-set-cite-format}, | |
3381 @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, and @code{reftex-add-section-levels}. | |
3382 Settings made with these functions remain local to the current | |
59536 | 3383 document. @xref{AUCTeX}. |
25829 | 3384 |
3385 @item | |
3386 @b{Funny display in selection buffer}@* | |
3387 @cindex @code{x-symbol}, Emacs package | |
3388 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{x-symbol} | |
3389 @cindex @code{isotex}, Emacs package | |
3390 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{isotex} | |
3391 @cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package | |
3392 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt} | |
3393 When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file | |
3394 different from its disk representation (e.g. x-symbol, isotex, | |
3395 iso-cvt) you may find that @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s parsing information sometimes | |
3396 reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited} | |
3397 parts of a multifile document, because @b{Ref@TeX{}} visits these files | |
3398 literally for speed reasons. Then both short context and section | |
3399 headings may look different from what you usually see on your screen. | |
3400 In rare cases @code{reftex-toc} may have problems to jump to an affected | |
3401 section heading. There are three possible ways to deal with | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3402 this: |
25829 | 3403 @itemize @minus |
3404 @item | |
3405 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
3406 @code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3407 This implies that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load all parts of a multifile | |
59536 | 3408 document into Emacs (i.e. there won't be any temporary buffers). |
25829 | 3409 @item |
3410 @vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
3411 @code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3412 This means full initialization of temporary buffers. It involves | |
59536 | 3413 a penalty when the same unvisited file is used for lookup often. |
25829 | 3414 @item |
3415 Set @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers} to a list of hook | |
59536 | 3416 functions doing a minimal initialization. |
25829 | 3417 @end itemize |
3418 @vindex reftex-refontify-context | |
3419 See also the variable @code{reftex-refontify-context}. | |
3420 | |
3421 @item | |
3422 @b{Labels as arguments to \begin}@* | |
3423 @cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package | |
3424 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf} | |
3425 Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro | |
3426 to specify a label. E.g. Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both | |
3427 @example | |
3428 \step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@} | |
3429 @var{claim} | |
3430 \end@{step+@} | |
3431 @end example | |
3432 | |
3433 @noindent | |
3434 We need to trick @b{Ref@TeX{}} into swallowing this: | |
3435 | |
3436 @lisp | |
3437 @group | |
3438 ;; Configuration for Lamport's pf.sty | |
3439 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3440 '(("\\step@{*@}@{@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 2 ("Step" "St.")) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3441 ("\\begin@{step+@}@{*@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 1000))) |
25829 | 3442 @end group |
3443 @end lisp | |
3444 | |
3445 @noindent | |
3446 The first line is just a normal configuration for a macro. For the | |
3447 @code{step+} environment we actually tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to look for the | |
3448 @emph{macro} @samp{\begin@{step+@}} and interpret the @emph{first} | |
3449 argument (which really is a second argument to the macro @code{\begin}) | |
3450 as a label of type @code{?p}. Argument count for this macro starts only | |
3451 after the @samp{@{step+@}}, also when specifying how to get | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3452 context. |
25829 | 3453 |
3454 @item | |
3455 @b{Idle timers in XEmacs}@* | |
3456 @cindex Idle timer restart | |
3457 @vindex reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs | |
3458 In XEmacs, idle timer restart does not work reliably after fast | |
3459 keystrokes. Therefore @b{Ref@TeX{}} currently uses the post command | |
3460 hook to start the timer used for automatic crossref information. When | |
3461 this bug gets fixed, a real idle timer can be requested with | |
3462 @lisp | |
3463 (setq reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs t) | |
3464 @end lisp | |
3465 | |
3466 @item | |
3467 @b{Viper mode}@* | |
3468 @cindex Viper mode | |
39267 | 3469 @cindex Key bindings, problems with Viper mode |
25829 | 3470 @findex viper-harness-minor-mode |
3471 With @i{Viper} mode prior to Vipers version 3.01, you need to protect | |
59536 | 3472 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s keymaps with |
25829 | 3473 |
3474 @lisp | |
3475 (viper-harness-minor-mode "reftex") | |
3476 @end lisp | |
3477 | |
3478 @end itemize | |
3479 | |
3480 @page | |
3481 @node Imprint, Commands, Problems and Work-Arounds, Top | |
3482 @section Imprint | |
3483 @cindex Imprint | |
3484 @cindex Maintainer | |
3485 @cindex Acknowledgments | |
3486 @cindex Thanks | |
3487 @cindex Bug reports | |
3488 @cindex @code{http}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} home page | |
3489 @cindex @code{ftp}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} site | |
3490 | |
58872
6233bef879d8
(Imprint): Remove erroneous @value's.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
57912
diff
changeset
|
3491 @b{Ref@TeX{}} was written by @i{Carsten Dominik} |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3492 @email{dominik@@science.uva.nl}, with contributions by @i{Stephen |
59536 | 3493 Eglen}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} is currently maintained by |
25829 | 3494 |
3495 @noindent | |
59536 | 3496 Carsten Dominik <dominik@@science.uva.nl> |
25829 | 3497 |
3498 If you have questions about @b{Ref@TeX{}}, there are several Usenet | |
3499 groups which have competent readers: @code{comp.emacs}, | |
59536 | 3500 @code{gnu.emacs.help}, @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.text.tex}, |
3501 @code{de.comp.text.tex}. You can also write directly to the | |
3502 maintainer. | |
25829 | 3503 |
3504 If you find a bug in @b{Ref@TeX{}} or its documentation, or if you want | |
59536 | 3505 to contribute code or ideas, please @value{MAINTAINERCONTACT}. Remember |
25829 | 3506 to provide all necessary information such as version numbers of Emacs |
3507 and @b{Ref@TeX{}}, and the relevant part of your configuration in | |
3508 @file{.emacs}. When reporting a bug which throws an exception, please | |
3509 include a backtrace if you know how to produce one. | |
3510 | |
3511 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre-installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
3512 It was also bundled and pre-installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
3513 21.x users want to install the corresponding plugin package which is | |
59536 | 3514 available from the @value{XEMACSFTP}. See the XEmacs 21.x |
3515 documentation on package installation for details. | |
25829 | 3516 |
3517 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a | |
59536 | 3518 @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the @value{MAINTAINERSITE}. Note that |
3519 the Emacs 19 version supports many but not all features described in | |
3520 this manual. | |
25829 | 3521 |
3522 Thanks to the people on the Net who have used @b{Ref@TeX{}} and helped | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3523 developing it with their reports. In particular thanks to @i{Fran |
59731
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3524 Burstall, Alastair Burt, Lars Clausen, Soren Dayton, Stephen Eglen, |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3525 Karl Eichwalder, Erik Frisk, Peter Galbraith, Kai Grossjohann, Frank |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3526 Harrell, Peter Heslin, Stephan Heuel, Alan Ho, Lute Kamstra, Dieter |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3527 Kraft, David Kastrup, Adrian Lanz, Juri Linkov, Rory Molinari, Stefan |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3528 Monnier, Laurent Mugnier, Dan Nicolaescu, Sudeep Kumar Palat, Daniel |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3529 Polani, Alan Shutko, Robin Socha, Richard Stanton, Allan Strand, Jan |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3530 Vroonhof, Christoph Wedler, Alan Williams, Roland Winkler, |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3531 Hans-Christoph Wirth, Eli Zaretskii}. |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3532 |
25829 | 3533 |
3534 The @code{view-crossref} feature was inspired by @i{Peter Galbraith's} | |
59536 | 3535 @file{bib-cite.el}. |
3536 | |
3537 Finally thanks to @i{Uwe Bolick} who first got me interested in | |
25829 | 3538 supporting LaTeX labels and references with an editor (which was |
59536 | 3539 MicroEmacs at the time). |
25829 | 3540 |
3541 @node Commands, Options, Imprint, Top | |
3542 @chapter Commands | |
3543 @cindex Commands, list of | |
3544 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3545 Here is a summary of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands which can be executed from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3546 LaTeX files. Command which are executed from the special buffers are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3547 not described here. All commands are available from the @code{Ref} |
39267 | 3548 menu. See @xref{Key Bindings}. |
25829 | 3549 |
3550 @deffn Command reftex-toc | |
3551 Show the table of contents for the current document. When called with | |
59536 | 3552 one ore two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan the document first. |
25829 | 3553 @end deffn |
3554 | |
3555 @deffn Command reftex-label | |
3556 Insert a unique label. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce | |
3557 document rescan first. | |
3558 @end deffn | |
3559 | |
3560 @deffn Command reftex-reference | |
3561 Start a selection process to select a label, and insert a reference to | |
3562 it. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce document rescan first. | |
3563 @end deffn | |
3564 | |
3565 @deffn Command reftex-citation | |
3566 Make a citation using BibTeX database files. After prompting for a regular | |
3567 expression, scans the buffers with BibTeX entries (taken from the | |
3568 @code{\bibliography} command or a @code{thebibliography} environment) | |
3569 and offers the matching entries for selection. The selected entry is | |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
3570 formatted according to @code{reftex-cite-format} and inserted into the |
59536 | 3571 buffer. @* |
3572 When called with a @kbd{C-u} prefixe, prompt for optional arguments in | |
3573 cite macros. When called with a numeric prefix, make that many citations. | |
25829 | 3574 When called with point inside the braces of a @code{\cite} command, it |
3575 will add another key, ignoring the value of | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3576 @code{reftex-cite-format}. @* |
25829 | 3577 The regular expression uses an expanded syntax: @samp{&&} is interpreted |
3578 as @code{and}. Thus, @samp{aaaa&&bbb} matches entries which contain | |
3579 both @samp{aaaa} and @samp{bbb}. While entering the regexp, completion | |
3580 on knows citation keys is possible. @samp{=} is a good regular | |
59536 | 3581 expression to match all entries in all files. |
25829 | 3582 @end deffn |
3583 | |
3584 @deffn Command reftex-index | |
3585 Query for an index macro and insert it along with its arguments. The | |
3586 index macros available are those defined in @code{reftex-index-macro} or | |
3587 by a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, typically from an AUCTeX | |
3588 style file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides completion for the index tag and the | |
59536 | 3589 index key, and will prompt for other arguments. |
25829 | 3590 @end deffn |
3591 | |
3592 @deffn Command reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
3593 Put current selection or the word near point into the default index | |
3594 macro. This uses the information in @code{reftex-index-default-macro} | |
3595 to make an index entry. The phrase indexed is the current selection or | |
3596 the word near point. When called with one @kbd{C-u} prefix, let the | |
3597 user have a chance to edit the index entry. When called with 2 | |
3598 @kbd{C-u} as prefix, also ask for the index macro and other stuff. When | |
3599 called inside TeX math mode as determined by the @file{texmathp.el} | |
3600 library which is part of AUCTeX, the string is first processed with the | |
59536 | 3601 @code{reftex-index-math-format}, which see. |
25829 | 3602 @end deffn |
3603 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3604 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3605 Add current selection or the word at point to the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3606 When you are in transient-mark-mode and the region is active, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3607 selection will be used - otherwise the word at point. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3608 You get a chance to edit the entry in the phrases buffer - to save the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3609 buffer and return to the LaTeX document, finish with @kbd{C-c C-c}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3610 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3611 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3612 @deffn Command reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3613 Switch to the phrases buffer, initialize if empty. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3614 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3615 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3616 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3617 Index all index phrases in the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3618 This works exactly like global indexing from the index phrases buffer, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3619 but operation is restricted to the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3620 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3621 |
25829 | 3622 @deffn Command reftex-display-index |
3623 Display a buffer with an index compiled from the current document. | |
3624 When the document has multiple indices, first prompts for the correct one. | |
3625 When index support is turned off, offer to turn it on. | |
3626 With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan document first. | |
3627 With prefix 2, restrict index to current document section. | |
59536 | 3628 With prefix 3, restrict index to active region. |
25829 | 3629 @end deffn |
3630 | |
3631 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref | |
3632 View cross reference of macro at point. Point must be on the @var{key} | |
3633 argument. Works with the macros @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, | |
3634 @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index} and many derivatives of | |
3635 these. Where it makes sense, subsequent calls show additional | |
3636 locations. See also the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra} and | |
3637 the command @code{reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex}. With one or two | |
3638 @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce rescanning of the document. With argument | |
3639 2, select the window showing the cross reference. | |
3640 @end deffn | |
3641 | |
3642 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex | |
3643 View location in a LaTeX document which cites the BibTeX entry at point. | |
3644 Since BibTeX files can be used by many LaTeX documents, this function | |
3645 prompts upon first use for a buffer in @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. To reset this | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3646 link to a document, call the function with a prefix arg. Calling |
25829 | 3647 this function several times find successive citation locations. |
3648 @end deffn | |
3649 | |
3650 @deffn Command reftex-create-tags-file | |
3651 Create TAGS file by running @code{etags} on the current document. The | |
3652 TAGS file is also immediately visited with | |
59536 | 3653 @code{visit-tags-table}. |
25829 | 3654 @end deffn |
3655 | |
3656 @deffn Command reftex-grep-document | |
3657 Run grep query through all files related to this document. | |
3658 With prefix arg, force to rescan document. | |
59536 | 3659 No active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3660 @end deffn |
3661 | |
3662 @deffn Command reftex-search-document | |
3663 Regexp search through all files of the current document. | |
3664 Starts always in the master file. Stops when a match is found. | |
59536 | 3665 No active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3666 @end deffn |
3667 | |
3668 @deffn Command reftex-query-replace-document | |
3669 Run a query-replace-regexp of @var{from} with @var{to} over the entire | |
3670 document. With prefix arg, replace only word-delimited matches. No | |
59536 | 3671 active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3672 @end deffn |
3673 | |
59731
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3674 @deffn Command reftex-isearch-minor-mode |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3675 Toggle a minor mode which enables incremental search to work globally |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3676 on the entire multifile document. Files will be searched in th |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3677 sequence they appear in the document. |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3678 @end deffn |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3679 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3680 @deffn Command reftex-goto-label |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3681 Prompt for a label (with completion) and jump to the location of this |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3682 label. Optional prefix argument @var{other-window} goes to the label in |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3683 another window. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3684 @end deffn |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3685 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3686 |
25829 | 3687 @deffn Command reftex-change-label |
3688 Query replace @var{from} with @var{to} in all @code{\label} and | |
3689 @code{\ref} commands. Works on the entire multifile document. No | |
59536 | 3690 active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3691 @end deffn |
3692 | |
3693 @deffn Command reftex-renumber-simple-labels | |
3694 Renumber all simple labels in the document to make them sequentially. | |
3695 Simple labels are the ones created by RefTeX, consisting only of the | |
3696 prefix and a number. After the command completes, all these labels will | |
3697 have sequential numbers throughout the document. Any references to the | |
3698 labels will be changed as well. For this, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the | |
3699 arguments of any macros which either start or end with the string | |
3700 @samp{ref}. This command should be used with care, in particular in | |
3701 multifile documents. You should not use it if another document refers | |
59536 | 3702 to this one with the @code{xr} package. |
25829 | 3703 @end deffn |
3704 | |
3705 @deffn Command reftex-find-duplicate-labels | |
59536 | 3706 Produce a list of all duplicate labels in the document. |
3707 @end deffn | |
3708 | |
3709 @deffn Command reftex-create-bibtex-file | |
3710 Create a new BibTeX database file with all entries referenced in document. | |
3711 The command prompts for a filename and writes the collected entries to | |
3712 that file. Only entries referenced in the current document with | |
3713 any @code{\cite}-like macros are used. | |
3714 The sequence in the new file is the same as it was in the old database. | |
25829 | 3715 @end deffn |
3716 | |
3717 @deffn Command reftex-customize | |
3718 Run the customize browser on the @b{Ref@TeX{}} group. | |
3719 @end deffn | |
3720 @deffn Command reftex-show-commentary | |
3721 Show the commentary section from @file{reftex.el}. | |
3722 @end deffn | |
3723 @deffn Command reftex-info | |
3724 Run info on the top @b{Ref@TeX{}} node. | |
3725 @end deffn | |
3726 @deffn Command reftex-parse-document | |
3727 Parse the entire document in order to update the parsing information. | |
3728 @end deffn | |
3729 @deffn Command reftex-reset-mode | |
3730 Enforce rebuilding of several internal lists and variables. Also | |
3731 removes the parse file associated with the current document. | |
3732 @end deffn | |
3733 | |
3734 @node Options, Keymaps and Hooks, Commands, Top | |
3735 @chapter Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
3736 @cindex Options, list of | |
3737 | |
3738 Here is a complete list of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration variables. All | |
3739 variables have customize support - so if you are not familiar with Emacs | |
3740 Lisp (and even if you are) you might find it more comfortable to use | |
3741 @code{customize} to look at and change these variables. @kbd{M-x | |
59536 | 3742 reftex-customize} will get you there. |
25829 | 3743 |
3744 @menu | |
3745 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
3746 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
3747 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
3748 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
3749 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
3750 * Options (Index Support):: | |
3751 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
3752 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
3753 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
3754 * Options (Fontification):: | |
3755 * Options (Misc):: | |
3756 @end menu | |
3757 | |
3758 @node Options (Table of Contents), Options (Defining Label Environments), , Options | |
3759 @section Table of Contents | |
3760 @cindex Options, table of contents | |
3761 @cindex Table of contents, options | |
3762 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3763 @defopt reftex-include-file-commands |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3764 List of LaTeX commands which input another file. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3765 The file name is expected after the command, either in braces or separated |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3766 by whitespace. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3767 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3768 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3769 @defopt reftex-max-section-depth |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3770 Maximum depth of section levels in document structure. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3771 Standard LaTeX needs 7, default is 12. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3772 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3773 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3774 @defopt reftex-section-levels |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3775 Commands and levels used for defining sections in the document. The |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3776 @code{car} of each cons cell is the name of the section macro. The |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3777 @code{cdr} is a number indicating its level. A negative level means the |
59536 | 3778 same as the positive value, but the section will never get a number. |
3779 The @code{cdr} may also be a function which then has to return the | |
3780 level. This list is also used for promotion and demption of sectioning | |
3781 commands. If you are using a document class which has several sets of | |
3782 sectioning commands, promotion only works correctly if this list is | |
3783 sorted first by set, then within each set by level. The promotion | |
3784 commands always select the nearest entry with the correct new level. | |
3785 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3786 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3787 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3788 @defopt reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3789 The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3790 Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3791 chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be |
59536 | 3792 changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3793 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3794 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3795 @defopt reftex-part-resets-chapter |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3796 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{\part} is like any other sectioning command. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3797 This means, part numbers will be included in the numbering of chapters, and |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3798 chapter counters will be reset for each part. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3799 When @code{nil} (the default), parts are special, do not reset the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3800 chapter counter and also do not show up in chapter numbers. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3801 @end defopt |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3802 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3803 @defopt reftex-auto-recenter-toc |
59536 | 3804 Non-@code{nil} means, turn automatic recentering of @file{*TOC*} window on. |
3805 When active, the @file{*TOC*} window will always show the section you | |
3806 are currently working in. Recentering happens whenever Emacs is idle for | |
3807 more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. | |
3808 | |
3809 Value @code{t} means, turn on immediately when RefTeX gets started. Then, | |
3810 recentering will work for any toc window created during the session. | |
3811 | |
3812 Value @code{frame} (the default) means, turn automatic recentering on | |
3813 only while the dedicated TOC frame does exist, and do the recentering | |
3814 only in that frame. So when creating that frame (with @kbd{d} key in an | |
3815 ordinary TOC window), the automatic recentering is turned on. When the | |
3816 frame gets destroyed, automatic recentering is turned off again. | |
3817 | |
3818 This feature can be turned on and off from the menu | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3819 (Ref->Options). |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3820 @end defopt |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3821 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3822 @defopt reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3823 Non-@code{nil} means, create TOC window by splitting window |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3824 horizontally. The default is to split vertically. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3825 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3826 |
59536 | 3827 @defopt reftex-toc-split-windows-fraction |
3828 Fraction of the width or height of the frame to be used for TOC window. | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3829 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3830 |
25829 | 3831 @defopt reftex-toc-keep-other-windows |
3832 Non-@code{nil} means, split the selected window to display the | |
3833 @file{*toc*} buffer. This helps to keep the window configuration, but | |
3834 makes the @file{*toc*} small. When @code{nil}, all other windows except | |
3835 the selected one will be deleted, so that the @file{*toc*} window fills | |
59536 | 3836 half the frame. |
25829 | 3837 @end defopt |
3838 | |
3839 @defopt reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
3840 Non-@code{nil} means, include file boundaries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3841 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
59536 | 3842 @kbd{i} key. |
25829 | 3843 @end defopt |
3844 | |
3845 @defopt reftex-toc-include-labels | |
3846 Non-@code{nil} means, include labels in @file{*toc*} buffer. This flag | |
3847 can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{l} | |
59536 | 3848 key. |
25829 | 3849 @end defopt |
3850 | |
3851 @defopt reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
3852 Non-@code{nil} means, include index entries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3853 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3854 @kbd{i} key. | |
3855 @end defopt | |
3856 | |
3857 @defopt reftex-toc-include-context | |
3858 Non-@code{nil} means, include context with labels in the @file{*toc*} | |
3859 buffer. Context will only be shown if the labels are visible as well. | |
3860 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
59536 | 3861 @kbd{c} key. |
25829 | 3862 @end defopt |
3863 | |
3864 @defopt reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
3865 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*toc*} buffer (the | |
3866 table-of-contents buffer) will cause other window to follow. The other | |
3867 window will show the corresponding part of the document. This flag can | |
3868 be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{f} | |
59536 | 3869 key. |
25829 | 3870 @end defopt |
3871 | |
3872 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-toc-mode-hook | |
3873 Normal hook which is run when a @file{*toc*} buffer is | |
59536 | 3874 created. |
25829 | 3875 @end deffn |
3876 | |
3877 @deffn Keymap reftex-toc-map | |
3878 The keymap which is active in the @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
59536 | 3879 (@pxref{Table of Contents}). |
25829 | 3880 @end deffn |
3881 | |
3882 @node Options (Defining Label Environments), Options (Creating Labels), Options (Table of Contents), Options | |
3883 @section Defining Label Environments | |
3884 @cindex Options, defining label environments | |
3885 @cindex Defining label environments, options | |
3886 | |
3887 @defopt reftex-default-label-alist-entries | |
3888 Default label alist specifications. It is a list of symbols with | |
3889 associations in the constant @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}. | |
59536 | 3890 @code{LaTeX} should always be the last entry. |
25829 | 3891 @end defopt |
3892 | |
3893 @defopt reftex-label-alist | |
3894 Set this variable to define additions and changes to the defaults in | |
3895 @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. The only things you | |
3896 @emph{must not} change is that @code{?s} is the type indicator for | |
3897 section labels, and @key{SPC} for the @code{any} label type. These are | |
59536 | 3898 hard-coded at other places in the code. |
25829 | 3899 |
3900 The value of the variable must be a list of items. Each item is a list | |
3901 itself and has the following structure: | |
3902 | |
3903 @example | |
3904 (@var{env-or-macro} @var{type-key} @var{label-prefix} @var{reference-format} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3905 @var{context-method} (@var{magic-word} ... ) @var{toc-level}) |
25829 | 3906 @end example |
3907 | |
3908 Each list entry describes either an environment carrying a counter for | |
3909 use with @code{\label} and @code{\ref}, or a LaTeX macro defining a | |
3910 label as (or inside) one of its arguments. The elements of each list | |
59536 | 3911 entry are: |
25829 | 3912 |
3913 @table @asis | |
3914 @item @var{env-or-macro} | |
3915 Name of the environment (like @samp{table}) or macro (like | |
3916 @samp{\myfig}). For macros, indicate the arguments, as in | |
3917 @samp{\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}}. Use square brackets for optional | |
3918 arguments, a star to mark the label argument, if any. The macro does | |
3919 not have to have a label argument - you could also use | |
59536 | 3920 @samp{\label@{...@}} inside one of its arguments. |
25829 | 3921 |
3922 Special names: @code{section} for section labels, @code{any} to define a | |
59536 | 3923 group which contains all labels. |
25829 | 3924 |
3925 This may also be a function to do local parsing and identify point to be | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3926 in a non-standard label environment. The function must take an |
25829 | 3927 argument @var{bound} and limit backward searches to this value. It |
3928 should return either nil or a cons cell @code{(@var{function} | |
3929 . @var{position})} with the function symbol and the position where the | |
3930 special environment starts. See the Info documentation for an | |
59536 | 3931 example. |
25829 | 3932 |
3933 Finally this may also be @code{nil} if the entry is only meant to change | |
3934 some settings associated with the type indicator character (see | |
59536 | 3935 below). |
25829 | 3936 |
3937 @item @var{type-key} | |
3938 Type indicator character, like @code{?t}, must be a printable ASCII | |
3939 character. The type indicator is a single character which defines a | |
3940 label type. Any label inside the environment or macro is assumed to | |
3941 belong to this type. The same character may occur several times in this | |
3942 list, to cover cases in which different environments carry the same | |
3943 label type (like @code{equation} and @code{eqnarray}). If the type | |
3944 indicator is @code{nil} and the macro has a label argument @samp{@{*@}}, | |
3945 the macro defines neutral labels just like @code{\label}. In this case | |
59536 | 3946 the reminder of this entry is ignored. |
25829 | 3947 |
3948 @item @var{label-prefix} | |
3949 Label prefix string, like @samp{tab:}. The prefix is a short string | |
3950 used as the start of a label. It may be the empty string. The prefix | |
59536 | 3951 may contain the following @samp{%} escapes: |
25829 | 3952 |
3953 @example | |
3954 %f Current file name, directory and extension stripped. | |
3955 %F Current file name relative to master file directory. | |
59536 | 3956 %m Master file name, directory and extension stripped. |
3957 %M Directory name (without path) where master file is located. | |
25829 | 3958 %u User login name, on systems which support this. |
3959 %S A section prefix derived with variable @code{reftex-section-prefixes}. | |
3960 @end example | |
3961 | |
3962 @noindent | |
3963 Example: In a file @file{intro.tex}, @samp{eq:%f:} will become | |
59536 | 3964 @samp{eq:intro:}. |
25829 | 3965 |
3966 @item @var{reference-format} | |
3967 Format string for reference insert in buffer. @samp{%s} will be | |
3968 replaced by the label. When the format starts with @samp{~}, this | |
3969 @samp{~} will only be inserted when the character before point is | |
59536 | 3970 @emph{not} a whitespace. |
25829 | 3971 |
3972 @item @var{context-method} | |
3973 Indication on how to find the short context. | |
3974 @itemize @minus | |
3975 @item | |
59536 | 3976 If @code{nil}, use the text following the @samp{\label@{...@}} macro. |
25829 | 3977 @item |
3978 If @code{t}, use | |
3979 @itemize @minus | |
3980 @item | |
3981 the section heading for section labels. | |
3982 @item | |
3983 text following the @samp{\begin@{...@}} statement of environments (not | |
3984 a good choice for environments like eqnarray or enumerate, where one has | |
59536 | 3985 several labels in a single environment). |
25829 | 3986 @item |
3987 text after the macro name (starting with the first arg) for | |
59536 | 3988 macros. |
25829 | 3989 @end itemize |
3990 @item | |
3991 If an integer, use the nth argument of the macro. As a special case, | |
59536 | 3992 1000 means to get text after the last macro argument. |
25829 | 3993 @item |
3994 If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label. | |
3995 Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g. putting | |
3996 this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table | |
3997 environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for | |
59536 | 3998 eqnarrays. |
25829 | 3999 @item |
4000 If any of @code{caption}, @code{item}, @code{eqnarray-like}, | |
4001 @code{alignat-like}, this symbol will internally be translated into an | |
4002 appropriate regexp (see also the variable | |
59536 | 4003 @code{reftex-default-context-regexps}). |
25829 | 4004 @item |
4005 If a function, call this function with the name of the environment/macro | |
4006 as argument. On call, point will be just after the @code{\label} macro. | |
4007 The function is expected to return a suitable context string. It should | |
4008 throw an exception (error) when failing to find context. As an example, | |
4009 here is a function returning the 10 chars following the label macro as | |
59536 | 4010 context: |
25829 | 4011 |
4012 @example | |
4013 (defun my-context-function (env-or-mac) | |
4014 (if (> (point-max) (+ 10 (point))) | |
4015 (buffer-substring (point) (+ 10 (point))) | |
4016 (error "Buffer too small"))) | |
4017 @end example | |
4018 @end itemize | |
4019 | |
4020 Label context is used in two ways by @b{Ref@TeX{}}: For display in the label | |
4021 menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different | |
4022 method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair. | |
4023 E.g. @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for | |
4024 display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label | |
59536 | 4025 string. This is actually used for section labels. |
25829 | 4026 |
4027 @item @var{magic-word-list} | |
4028 List of magic words which identify a reference to be of this type. If | |
4029 the word before point is equal to one of these words when calling | |
4030 @code{reftex-reference}, the label list offered will be automatically | |
4031 restricted to labels of the correct type. If the first element of this | |
4032 word--list is the symbol `regexp', the strings are interpreted as regular | |
59536 | 4033 expressions. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4034 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4035 @item @var{toc-level} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4036 The integer level at which this environment should be added to the table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4037 of contents. See also @code{reftex-section-levels}. A positive value |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4038 will number the entries mixed with the sectioning commands of the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4039 level. A negative value will make unnumbered entries. Useful only for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4040 theorem-like environments which structure the document. Will be ignored |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4041 for macros. When omitted or @code{nil}, no TOC entries will be |
59536 | 4042 made. |
25829 | 4043 @end table |
4044 | |
4045 If the type indicator characters of two or more entries are the same, | |
59536 | 4046 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use |
25829 | 4047 @itemize @minus |
4048 @item | |
4049 the first non-@code{nil} format and prefix | |
4050 @item | |
4051 the magic words of all involved entries. | |
4052 @end itemize | |
4053 | |
4054 Any list entry may also be a symbol. If that has an association in | |
4055 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}, the @code{cddr} of that association is | |
4056 spliced into the list. However, builtin defaults should normally be set | |
59536 | 4057 with the variable @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. |
25829 | 4058 @end defopt |
4059 | |
4060 @defopt reftex-section-prefixes | |
4061 Prefixes for section labels. When the label prefix given in an entry in | |
4062 @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to | |
4063 determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section | |
4064 level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form | |
4065 @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro | |
4066 names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in | |
4067 @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. | |
4068 @end defopt | |
4069 | |
4070 @defopt reftex-default-context-regexps | |
4071 Alist with default regular expressions for finding context. The emacs | |
4072 lisp form @w{@code{(format regexp (regexp-quote environment))}} is used | |
4073 to calculate the final regular expression - so @samp{%s} will be | |
59536 | 4074 replaced with the environment or macro. |
4075 @end defopt | |
4076 | |
4077 @defopt reftex-trust-label-prefix | |
4078 Non-@code{nil} means, trust the label prefix when determining label type. | |
4079 It is customary to use special label prefixes to distinguish different label | |
4080 types. The label prefixes have no syntactic meaning in LaTeX (unless | |
4081 special packages like fancyref) are being used. RefTeX can and by | |
4082 default does parse around each label to detect the correct label type, | |
4083 but this process can be slow when a document contains thousands of | |
4084 labels. If you use label prefixes consistently, you may speed up | |
4085 document parsing by setting this variable to a non-nil value. RefTeX | |
4086 will then compare the label prefix with the prefixes found in | |
4087 `reftex-label-alist' and derive the correct label type in this way. | |
4088 Possible values for this option are: | |
4089 | |
4090 @example | |
4091 t @r{This means to trust any label prefixes found.} | |
4092 regexp @r{If a regexp, only prefixes matched by the regexp are trusted.} | |
4093 list @r{List of accepted prefixes, as strings. The colon is part of} | |
4094 @r{the prefix, e.g. ("fn:" "eqn:" "item:").} | |
4095 nil @r{Never trust a label prefix.} | |
4096 @end example | |
4097 The only disadvantage of using this feature is that the label context | |
4098 displayed in the label selection buffer along with each label is | |
4099 simply some text after the label definition. This is no problem if you | |
4100 place labels keeping this in mind (e.g. @i{before} the equation, @i{at | |
4101 the beginning} of a fig/tab caption ...). Anyway, it is probably best | |
4102 to use the regexp or the list value types to fine-tune this feature. | |
4103 For example, if your document contains thousands of footnotes with | |
4104 labels fn:xxx, you may want to set this variable to the value "^fn:$" or | |
4105 ("fn:"). Then RefTeX will still do extensive parsing for any | |
4106 non-footnote labels. | |
25829 | 4107 @end defopt |
4108 | |
4109 @node Options (Creating Labels), Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Defining Label Environments), Options | |
4110 @section Creating Labels | |
4111 @cindex Options, creating labels | |
4112 @cindex Creating labels, options | |
4113 | |
4114 @defopt reftex-insert-label-flags | |
4115 Flags governing label insertion. The value has the form | |
4116 | |
4117 @example | |
4118 (@var{derive} @var{prompt}) | |
4119 @end example | |
4120 | |
4121 If @var{derive}is @code{t}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will try to derive a sensible | |
4122 label from context. A section label for example will be derived from | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4123 the section heading. The conversion of the context to a valid label is |
25829 | 4124 governed by the specifications given in |
4125 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. If @var{derive} is @code{nil}, | |
4126 the default label will consist of the prefix and a unique number, like | |
59536 | 4127 @samp{eq:23}. |
25829 | 4128 |
4129 If @var{prompt} is @code{t}, the user will be prompted for a label | |
4130 string. When @var{prompt} is @code{nil}, the default label will be | |
59536 | 4131 inserted without query. |
25829 | 4132 |
4133 So the combination of @var{derive} and @var{prompt} controls label | |
59536 | 4134 insertion. Here is a table describing all four possibilities: |
25829 | 4135 |
4136 @example | |
4137 @group | |
4138 @var{derive} @var{prompt} @var{action} | |
4139 ----------------------------------------------------------- | |
4140 nil nil @r{Insert simple label, like @samp{eq:22} or @samp{sec:13}. No query.} | |
4141 nil t @r{Prompt for label.} | |
4142 t nil @r{Derive a label from context and insert. No query.} | |
4143 t t @r{Derive a label from context, prompt for confirmation.} | |
4144 @end group | |
4145 @end example | |
4146 | |
4147 Each flag may be set to @code{t}, @code{nil}, or a string of label type | |
4148 letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. Thus, | |
4149 the combination may be set differently for each label type. The default | |
4150 settings @samp{"s"} and @samp{"sft"} mean: Derive section labels from | |
4151 headings (with confirmation). Prompt for figure and table labels. Use | |
59536 | 4152 simple labels without confirmation for everything else. |
25829 | 4153 |
4154 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
4155 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
4156 (footnote), @code{N} (endnote) plus any definitions in | |
59536 | 4157 @code{reftex-label-alist}. |
25829 | 4158 @end defopt |
4159 | |
4160 @deffn Hook reftex-format-label-function | |
4161 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4162 insert as a label definition. The function will be called with two | |
4163 arguments, the @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually | |
4164 @samp{\label@{%s@}}). It should return the string to insert into the | |
59536 | 4165 buffer. |
25829 | 4166 @end deffn |
4167 | |
4168 @deffn Hook reftex-string-to-label-function | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4169 Function to turn an arbitrary string into a valid label. |
25829 | 4170 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default function uses the variable |
59536 | 4171 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. |
25829 | 4172 @end deffn |
4173 | |
4174 @deffn Hook reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
4175 Filter function which will process a context string before it is used to | |
4176 derive a label from it. The intended application is to convert ISO or | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4177 Mule characters into something valid in labels. The default function |
25829 | 4178 @code{reftex-latin1-to-ascii} removes the accents from Latin-1 |
4179 characters. X-Symbol (>=2.6) sets this variable to the much more | |
59536 | 4180 general @code{x-symbol-translate-to-ascii}. |
25829 | 4181 @end deffn |
4182 | |
4183 @defopt reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
4184 Parameters for converting a string into a label. This variable is a | |
59536 | 4185 list of the following items: |
25829 | 4186 @table @asis |
4187 @item @var{nwords} | |
4188 Number of words to use. | |
4189 @item @var{maxchar} | |
4190 Maximum number of characters in a label string. | |
60919
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
4191 @item @var{invalid} |
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
4192 @code{nil}: Throw away any words containing characters invalid in labels.@* |
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
4193 @code{t}: Throw away only the invalid characters, not the whole word. |
25829 | 4194 @item @var{abbrev} |
4195 @code{nil}: Never abbreviate words.@* | |
4196 @code{t}: Always abbreviate words (see @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}).@* | |
4197 @code{1}: Abbreviate words if necessary to shorten label string. | |
4198 @item @var{separator} | |
4199 String separating different words in the label. | |
4200 @item @var{ignorewords} | |
4201 List of words which should not be part of labels. | |
4202 @item @var{downcase} | |
4203 @code{t}: Downcase words before putting them into the label.@* | |
4204 @end table | |
4205 @end defopt | |
4206 | |
4207 @defopt reftex-label-illegal-re | |
60919
3ad3287d2e49
* calc.texi, reftex.texi: Replace `illegal' with `invalid'.
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
59731
diff
changeset
|
4208 Regexp matching characters not valid in labels. |
25829 | 4209 @end defopt |
4210 | |
4211 @defopt reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
59536 | 4212 Parameters for abbreviation of words. A list of four parameters. |
25829 | 4213 @table @asis |
4214 @item @var{min-chars} | |
4215 Minimum number of characters remaining after abbreviation. | |
4216 @item @var{min-kill} | |
59536 | 4217 Minimum number of characters to remove when abbreviating words. |
25829 | 4218 @item @var{before} |
59536 | 4219 Character class before abbrev point in word. |
25829 | 4220 @item @var{after} |
59536 | 4221 Character class after abbrev point in word. |
25829 | 4222 @end table |
4223 @end defopt | |
4224 | |
4225 @node Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Creating Citations), Options (Creating Labels), Options | |
4226 @section Referencing Labels | |
4227 @cindex Options, referencing labels | |
4228 @cindex Referencing labels, options | |
4229 | |
4230 @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags | |
4231 List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: | |
4232 @table @asis | |
4233 @item @var{table-of-contents} | |
59536 | 4234 Show the labels embedded in a table of context. |
25829 | 4235 @item @var{section-numbers} |
59536 | 4236 Include section numbers (like 4.1.3) in table of contents. |
25829 | 4237 @item @var{counters} |
59536 | 4238 Show counters. This just numbers the labels in the menu. |
25829 | 4239 @item @var{no-context} |
59536 | 4240 Non-@code{nil} means do @emph{not} show the short context. |
25829 | 4241 @item @var{follow} |
59536 | 4242 Follow full context in other window. |
25829 | 4243 @item @var{show-commented} |
59536 | 4244 Show labels from regions which are commented out. |
25829 | 4245 @item @var{match-everywhere} |
59536 | 4246 Obsolete flag. |
25829 | 4247 @item @var{show-files} |
59536 | 4248 Show begin and end of included files. |
25829 | 4249 @end table |
4250 | |
4251 Each of these flags can be set to @code{t} or @code{nil}, or to a string | |
4252 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. | |
4253 These strings work like character classes in regular expressions. Thus, | |
4254 setting one of the flags to @samp{"sf"} makes the flag true for section | |
4255 and figure labels, @code{nil} for everything else. Setting it to | |
59536 | 4256 @samp{"^sf"} makes it the other way round. |
25829 | 4257 |
4258 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
4259 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
59536 | 4260 (footnote), plus any definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist}. |
25829 | 4261 |
4262 Most options can also be switched from the label menu itself - so if you | |
4263 decide here to not have a table of contents in the label menu, you can | |
59536 | 4264 still get one interactively during selection from the label menu. |
25829 | 4265 @end defopt |
4266 | |
4267 @defopt reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
4268 Punctuation strings for multiple references. When marking is used in | |
4269 the selection buffer to select several references, this variable | |
4270 associates the 3 marking characters @samp{,-+} with prefix strings to be | |
4271 inserted into the buffer before the corresponding @code{\ref} macro. | |
4272 This is used to string together whole reference sets, like | |
4273 @samp{eqs. 1,2,3-5,6 and 7} in a single call to | |
59536 | 4274 @code{reftex-reference}. |
25829 | 4275 @end defopt |
4276 | |
4277 @defopt reftex-vref-is-default | |
4278 Non-@code{nil} means, the varioref macro @code{\vref} is used as | |
4279 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{v} key toggles the reference | |
4280 macro between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref}. The value of this variable | |
4281 determines the default which is active when entering the selection | |
4282 process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be a string | |
4283 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be | |
59536 | 4284 true. |
25829 | 4285 @end defopt |
4286 | |
4287 @defopt reftex-fref-is-default | |
4288 Non-@code{nil} means, the fancyref macro @code{\fref} is used as | |
4289 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{V} key toggles the reference | |
4290 macro between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The value of | |
4291 this variable determines the default which is active when entering the | |
4292 selection process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be | |
4293 a string of type letters indicating the label types for which it should | |
4294 be true. | |
4295 @end defopt | |
4296 | |
4297 @deffn Hook reftex-format-ref-function | |
4298 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4299 insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be | |
4300 changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the | |
4301 special commands to insert @code{\vref} and @code{\fref} references, so | |
4302 even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the special | |
4303 commands. The function will be called with two arguments, the | |
4304 @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually @samp{~\ref@{%s@}}). | |
59536 | 4305 It should return the string to insert into the buffer. |
25829 | 4306 @end deffn |
4307 | |
4308 @defopt reftex-level-indent | |
59536 | 4309 Number of spaces to be used for indentation per section level. |
25829 | 4310 @end defopt |
4311 | |
4312 @defopt reftex-guess-label-type | |
4313 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{reftex-reference} will try to guess the | |
4314 label type. To do that, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will look at the word before the | |
4315 cursor and compare it with the magic words given in | |
4316 @code{reftex-label-alist}. When it finds a match, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
4317 immediately offer the correct label menu - otherwise it will prompt you | |
4318 for a label type. If you set this variable to @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
59536 | 4319 will always prompt for a label type. |
25829 | 4320 @end defopt |
4321 | |
4322 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-display-copied-context-hook | |
4323 Normal Hook which is run before context is displayed anywhere. Designed | |
59536 | 4324 for @w{@code{X-Symbol}}, but may have other uses as well. |
25829 | 4325 @end deffn |
4326 | |
4327 @deffn Hook reftex-pre-refontification-functions | |
4328 @code{X-Symbol} specific hook. Probably not useful for other purposes. | |
4329 The functions get two arguments, the buffer from where the command | |
4330 started and a symbol indicating in what context the hook is | |
59536 | 4331 called. |
25829 | 4332 @end deffn |
4333 | |
4334 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-label-mode-hook | |
4335 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4336 @code{reftex-select-label-mode}. |
25829 | 4337 @end deffn |
4338 | |
4339 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-label-map | |
4340 The keymap which is active in the labels selection process | |
59536 | 4341 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
25829 | 4342 @end deffn |
4343 | |
4344 @node Options (Creating Citations), Options (Index Support), Options (Referencing Labels), Options | |
4345 @section Creating Citations | |
4346 @cindex Options, creating citations | |
4347 @cindex Creating citations, options | |
4348 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4349 @defopt reftex-bibliography-commands |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4350 LaTeX commands which specify the BibTeX databases to use with the document. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4351 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4352 |
25829 | 4353 @defopt reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps |
4354 List of regular expressions to exclude files in | |
4355 @code{\\bibliography@{..@}}. File names matched by any of these regexps | |
4356 will not be parsed. Intended for files which contain only | |
4357 @code{@@string} macro definitions and the like, which are ignored by | |
59536 | 4358 @b{Ref@TeX{}} anyway. |
25829 | 4359 @end defopt |
4360 | |
4361 @defopt reftex-default-bibliography | |
4362 List of BibTeX database files which should be used if none are specified. | |
4363 When @code{reftex-citation} is called from a document with neither | |
4364 a @samp{\bibliography@{...@}} statement nor a @code{thebibliography} | |
4365 environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will scan these files instead. Intended for | |
4366 using @code{reftex-citation} in non-LaTeX files. The files will be | |
59536 | 4367 searched along the BIBINPUTS or TEXBIB path. |
25829 | 4368 @end defopt |
4369 | |
4370 @defopt reftex-sort-bibtex-matches | |
4371 Sorting of the entries found in BibTeX databases by reftex-citation. | |
59536 | 4372 Possible values: |
25829 | 4373 @example |
4374 nil @r{Do not sort entries.} | |
4375 author @r{Sort entries by author name.} | |
4376 year @r{Sort entries by increasing year.} | |
4377 reverse-year @r{Sort entries by decreasing year.} | |
4378 @end example | |
4379 @end defopt | |
4380 | |
4381 @defopt reftex-cite-format | |
4382 The format of citations to be inserted into the buffer. It can be a | |
4383 string, an alist or a symbol. In the simplest case this is just the string | |
4384 @samp{\cite@{%l@}}, which is also the default. See the definition of | |
59536 | 4385 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin} for more complex examples. |
25829 | 4386 |
4387 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is a string, it will be used as the format. | |
59536 | 4388 In the format, the following percent escapes will be expanded. |
25829 | 4389 |
4390 @table @code | |
4391 @item %l | |
4392 The BibTeX label of the citation. | |
4393 @item %a | |
4394 List of author names, see also @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
4395 @item %2a | |
4396 Like %a, but abbreviate more than 2 authors like Jones et al. | |
4397 @item %A | |
4398 First author name only. | |
4399 @item %e | |
4400 Works like @samp{%a}, but on list of editor names. (@samp{%2e} and | |
59536 | 4401 @samp{%E} work a well). |
25829 | 4402 @end table |
4403 | |
4404 It is also possible to access all other BibTeX database fields: | |
4405 | |
4406 @example | |
4407 %b booktitle %c chapter %d edition %h howpublished | |
4408 %i institution %j journal %k key %m month | |
4409 %n number %o organization %p pages %P first page | |
4410 %r address %s school %u publisher %t title | |
4411 %v volume %y year | |
4412 %B booktitle, abbreviated %T title, abbreviated | |
4413 @end example | |
4414 | |
4415 @noindent | |
4416 Usually, only @samp{%l} is needed. The other stuff is mainly for the | |
59536 | 4417 echo area display, and for @code{(setq reftex-comment-citations t)}. |
25829 | 4418 |
4419 @samp{%<} as a special operator kills punctuation and space around it | |
59536 | 4420 after the string has been formatted. |
4421 | |
4422 A pair of square brackets indicates an optional argument, and RefTeX | |
4423 will prompt for the values of these arguments. | |
25829 | 4424 |
4425 Beware that all this only works with BibTeX database files. When | |
4426 citations are made from the @code{\bibitems} in an explicit | |
59536 | 4427 @code{thebibliography} environment, only @samp{%l} is available. |
25829 | 4428 |
4429 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is an alist of characters and strings, the | |
4430 user will be prompted for a character to select one of the possible | |
59536 | 4431 format strings. |
25829 | 4432 |
4433 In order to configure this variable, you can either set | |
4434 @code{reftex-cite-format} directly yourself or set it to the | |
4435 @emph{symbol} of one of the predefined styles. The predefined symbols | |
4436 are those which have an association in the constant | |
4437 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin}) E.g.: @code{(setq reftex-cite-format | |
59536 | 4438 'natbib)}. |
25829 | 4439 @end defopt |
4440 | |
4441 @deffn Hook reftex-format-cite-function | |
4442 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4443 insert as a citation. Note that the citation format can also be changed | |
4444 with the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. The function will be | |
4445 called with two arguments, the @var{citation-key} and the | |
4446 @var{default-format} (taken from @code{reftex-cite-format}). It should | |
59536 | 4447 return the string to insert into the buffer. |
25829 | 4448 @end deffn |
4449 | |
59536 | 4450 @defopt reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args |
4451 Non-@code{nil} means, prompt for empty optional arguments in cite macros. | |
4452 When an entry in @code{reftex-cite-format} ist given with square brackets to | |
4453 indicate optional arguments (for example @samp{\\cite[][]@{%l@}}), RefTeX can | |
4454 prompt for values. Possible values are: | |
4455 @example | |
4456 nil @r{Never prompt for optional arguments} | |
4457 t @r{Always prompt} | |
4458 maybe @r{Prompt only if @code{reftex-citation} was called with C-u prefix arg}@end example | |
4459 Unnecessary empty optional arguments are removed before insertion into | |
4460 the buffer. See @code{reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args}. | |
4461 @end defopt | |
4462 | |
4463 @defopt reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args | |
4464 Non-@code{nil} means, remove empty optional arguments from cite macros | |
4465 if possible. | |
4466 @end defopt | |
4467 | |
25829 | 4468 @defopt reftex-comment-citations |
4469 Non-@code{nil} means add a comment for each citation describing the full | |
4470 entry. The comment is formatted according to | |
59536 | 4471 @code{reftex-cite-comment-format}. |
25829 | 4472 @end defopt |
4473 | |
4474 @defopt reftex-cite-comment-format | |
4475 Citation format used for commented citations. Must @emph{not} contain | |
4476 @samp{%l}. See the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible | |
59536 | 4477 percent escapes. |
25829 | 4478 @end defopt |
4479 | |
4480 @defopt reftex-cite-punctuation | |
4481 Punctuation for formatting of name lists in citations. This is a list | |
59536 | 4482 of 3 strings. |
25829 | 4483 @enumerate |
4484 @item | |
4485 normal names separator, like @samp{, } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4486 @item | |
4487 final names separator, like @samp{ and } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4488 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4489 The @samp{et al.} string, like @samp{ @{\it et al.@}} in |
25829 | 4490 Jones @{\it et al.@} |
4491 @end enumerate | |
4492 @end defopt | |
4493 | |
4494 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-bib-mode-hook | |
4495 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4496 @code{reftex-select-bib-mode}. |
25829 | 4497 @end deffn |
4498 | |
4499 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-bib-map | |
4500 The keymap which is active in the citation-key selection process | |
59536 | 4501 (@pxref{Creating Citations}). |
25829 | 4502 @end deffn |
4503 | |
4504 @node Options (Index Support), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Creating Citations), Options | |
4505 @section Index Support | |
4506 @cindex Options, Index support | |
4507 @cindex Index support, options | |
4508 | |
4509 @defopt reftex-support-index | |
4510 Non-@code{nil} means, index entries are parsed as well. Index support | |
4511 is resource intensive and the internal structure holding the parsed | |
4512 information can become quite big. Therefore it can be turned off. When | |
4513 this is @code{nil} and you execute a command which requires index | |
4514 support, you will be asked for confirmation to turn it on and rescan the | |
59536 | 4515 document. |
25829 | 4516 @end defopt |
4517 | |
4518 @defopt reftex-index-special-chars | |
4519 List of special characters in index entries, given as strings. These | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4520 correspond to the @code{MakeIndex} keywords |
25829 | 4521 @code{(@var{level} @var{encap} @var{actual} @var{quote} @var{escape})}. |
4522 @end defopt | |
4523 | |
4524 @defopt reftex-index-macros | |
4525 List of macros which define index entries. The structure of each entry | |
4526 is | |
4527 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4528 (@var{macro} @var{index-tag} @var{key} @var{prefix} @var{exclude} @var{repeat}) |
25829 | 4529 @end lisp |
4530 | |
4531 @var{macro} is the macro. Arguments should be denoted by empty braces, | |
4532 as for example in @samp{\index[]@{*@}}. Use square brackets to denote | |
59536 | 4533 optional arguments. The star marks where the index key is. |
25829 | 4534 |
4535 @var{index-tag} is a short name of the index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} | |
4536 are reserved for the default index and the glossary. Other indices can | |
4537 be defined as well. If this is an integer, the Nth argument of the | |
59536 | 4538 macro holds the index tag. |
25829 | 4539 |
4540 @var{key} is a character which is used to identify the macro for input | |
4541 with @code{reftex-index}. @samp{?i}, @samp{?I}, and @samp{?g} are | |
59536 | 4542 reserved for default index and glossary. |
25829 | 4543 |
4544 @var{prefix} can be a prefix which is added to the @var{key} part of the | |
4545 index entry. If you have a macro | |
4546 @code{\newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}}, this prefix | |
59536 | 4547 should be @samp{Molecules!}. |
25829 | 4548 |
4549 @var{exclude} can be a function. If this function exists and returns a | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4550 non-@code{nil} value, the index entry at point is ignored. This was |
25829 | 4551 implemented to support the (deprecated) @samp{^} and @samp{_} shortcuts |
59536 | 4552 in the LaTeX2e @code{index} package. |
25829 | 4553 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4554 @var{repeat}, if non-@code{nil}, means the index macro does not typeset |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4555 the entry in the text, so that the text has to be repeated outside the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4556 index macro. Needed for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} and for |
59536 | 4557 indexing from the phrase buffer. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4558 |
25829 | 4559 The final entry may also be a symbol. It must have an association in |
4560 the variable @code{reftex-index-macros-builtin} to specify the main | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4561 indexing package you are using. Valid values are currently |
25829 | 4562 @example |
4563 default @r{The LaTeX default - unnecessary to specify this one} | |
4564 multind @r{The multind.sty package} | |
4565 index @r{The index.sty package} | |
4566 index-shortcut @r{The index.sty packages with the ^ and _ shortcuts.} | |
4567 @r{Should not be used - only for old documents} | |
4568 @end example | |
4569 Note that AUCTeX sets these things internally for @b{Ref@TeX{}} as well, | |
4570 so with a sufficiently new version of AUCTeX, you should not set the | |
4571 package here. | |
4572 @end defopt | |
4573 | |
4574 @defopt reftex-index-default-macro | |
4575 The default index macro for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}. | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4576 This is a list with @code{(@var{macro-key} @var{default-tag})}. |
25829 | 4577 |
4578 @var{macro-key} is a character identifying an index macro - see | |
4579 @code{reftex-index-macros}. | |
4580 | |
4581 @var{default-tag} is the tag to be used if the macro requires a | |
4582 @var{tag} argument. When this is @code{nil} and a @var{tag} is needed, | |
4583 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask for it. When this is the empty string and the | |
4584 TAG argument of the index macro is optional, the TAG argument will be | |
59536 | 4585 omitted. |
25829 | 4586 @end defopt |
4587 | |
4588 @defopt reftex-index-default-tag | |
4589 Default index tag. When working with multiple indexes, RefTeX queries | |
4590 for an index tag when creating index entries or displaying a specific | |
4591 index. This variable controls the default offered for these queries. | |
4592 The default can be selected with @key{RET} during selection or | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4593 completion. Valid values of this variable are: |
25829 | 4594 @example |
4595 nil @r{Do not provide a default index} | |
4596 "tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g. "idx"} | |
4597 last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default} | |
4598 @end example | |
4599 @end defopt | |
4600 | |
4601 @defopt reftex-index-math-format | |
4602 Format of index entries when copied from inside math mode. When | |
4603 @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside TeX math mode, | |
4604 the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format | |
4605 string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the | |
4606 math delimiters (e.g. @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the | |
59536 | 4607 @file{texmathp.el} library which is part of AUCTeX. |
25829 | 4608 @end defopt |
4609 | |
27195 | 4610 @defopt reftex-index-phrase-file-extension |
4611 File extension for the index phrase file. This extension will be added | |
4612 to the base name of the master file. | |
4613 @end defopt | |
4614 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4615 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4616 Regexp matching the @samp{and} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4617 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4618 this operator, each part will generate an index macro. So each match of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4619 the search phrase will produce @emph{several} different index entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4620 Make sure this does no match things which are not separators. This |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4621 logical @samp{and} has higher priority than the logical @samp{or} |
59536 | 4622 specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4623 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4624 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4625 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4626 Regexp matching the @samp{or} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4627 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4628 this operator, the user will be asked to select one of them at each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4629 match of the search phrase. The first index arg will be the default. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4630 number key @kbd{1}--@kbd{9} must be pressed to switch to another. Make |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4631 sure this does no match things which are not separators. The logical |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4632 @samp{and} specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp} |
59536 | 4633 has higher priority than this logical @samp{or}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4634 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4635 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4636 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-search-whole-words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4637 Non-@code{nil} means phrases search will look for whole words, not subwords. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4638 This works by requiring word boundaries at the beginning and end of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4639 the search string. When the search phrase already has a non-word-char |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4640 at one of these points, no word boundary is required there. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4641 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4642 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4643 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-case-fold-search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4644 Non-@code{nil} means, searching for index phrases will ignore |
59536 | 4645 case. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4646 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4647 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4648 @defopt reftex-index-verify-function |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4649 A function which is called at each match during global indexing. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4650 If the function returns nil, the current match is skipped. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4651 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4652 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4653 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-skip-indexed-matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4654 Non-@code{nil} means, skip matches which appear to be indexed already. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4655 When doing global indexing from the phrases buffer, searches for some |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4656 phrases may match at places where that phrase was already indexed. In |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4657 particular when indexing an already processed document again, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4658 will even be the norm. When this variable is non-@code{nil}, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4659 @b{Ref@TeX{}} checks if the match is an index macro argument, or if an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4660 index macro is directly before or after the phrase. If that is the |
59536 | 4661 case, that match will be ignored. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4662 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4663 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4664 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-wrap-long-lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4665 Non-@code{nil} means, when indexing from the phrases buffer, wrap lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4666 Inserting indexing commands in a line makes the line longer - often |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4667 so long that it does not fit onto the screen. When this variable is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4668 non-@code{nil}, newlines will be added as necessary before and/or after the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4669 indexing command to keep lines short. However, the matched text |
59536 | 4670 phrase and its index command will always end up on a single line. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4671 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4672 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4673 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4674 Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4675 is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4676 sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4677 an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is |
59536 | 4678 non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4679 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4680 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4681 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4682 Non-@code{nil} means, empty and comment lines separate phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4683 into blocks. Sorting will then preserve blocks, so that lines are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4684 re-arranged only within blocks. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4685 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4686 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4687 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-map |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4688 Keymap for the Index Phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4689 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4690 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4691 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-mode-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4692 Normal hook which is run when a buffer is put into |
59536 | 4693 @code{reftex-index-phrases-mode}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4694 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4695 |
25829 | 4696 @defopt reftex-index-section-letters |
4697 The letters which denote sections in the index. Usually these are all | |
4698 capital letters. Don't use any downcase letters. Order is not | |
4699 significant, the index will be sorted by whatever the sort function | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4700 thinks is correct. In addition to these letters, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4701 create a group @samp{!} which contains all entries sorted below the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4702 lowest specified letter. In the @file{*Index*} buffer, pressing any of |
59536 | 4703 these capital letters or @kbd{!} will jump to that section. |
25829 | 4704 @end defopt |
4705 | |
4706 @defopt reftex-index-include-context | |
4707 Non-@code{nil} means, display the index definition context in the | |
4708 @file{*Index*} buffer. This flag may also be toggled from the | |
4709 @file{*Index*} buffer with the @kbd{c} key. | |
4710 @end defopt | |
4711 | |
4712 @defopt reftex-index-follow-mode | |
4713 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*Index*} buffer will cause other | |
4714 window to follow. The other window will show the corresponding part of | |
4715 the document. This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*Index*} | |
4716 buffer with the @kbd{f} key. | |
4717 @end defopt | |
4718 | |
4719 @deffn Keymap reftex-index-map | |
4720 The keymap which is active in the @file{*Index*} buffer | |
59536 | 4721 (@pxref{Index Support}). |
25829 | 4722 @end deffn |
4723 | |
4724 @node Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Finding Files), Options (Index Support), Options | |
4725 @section Viewing Cross-References | |
4726 @cindex Options, viewing cross-references | |
4727 @cindex Viewing cross-references, options | |
4728 | |
4729 @defopt reftex-view-crossref-extra | |
4730 Macros which can be used for the display of cross references. | |
4731 This is used when `reftex-view-crossref' is called with point in an | |
4732 argument of a macro. Note that crossref viewing for citations, | |
4733 references (both ways) and index entries is hard-coded. This variable | |
4734 is only to configure additional structures for which crossreference | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4735 viewing can be useful. Each entry has the structure |
25829 | 4736 @example |
4737 (@var{macro-re} @var{search-re} @var{highlight}). | |
4738 @end example | |
4739 @var{macro-re} is matched against the macro. @var{search-re} is the | |
4740 regexp used to search for cross references. @samp{%s} in this regexp is | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4741 replaced with the macro argument at point. @var{highlight} is an |
25829 | 4742 integer indicating which subgroup of the match should be highlighted. |
4743 @end defopt | |
4744 | |
4745 @defopt reftex-auto-view-crossref | |
4746 Non-@code{nil} means, initially turn automatic viewing of crossref info | |
4747 on. Automatic viewing of crossref info normally uses the echo area. | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4748 Whenever point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4749 the argument of a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro, and no other |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4750 message is being displayed, the echo area will display information about |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4751 that cross reference. You can also set the variable to the symbol |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4752 @code{window}. In this case a small temporary window is used for the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4753 display. This feature can be turned on and off from the menu |
59536 | 4754 (Ref->Options). |
25829 | 4755 @end defopt |
4756 | |
4757 @defopt reftex-idle-time | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4758 Time (secs) Emacs has to be idle before automatic crossref display |
59536 | 4759 or toc recentering is done. |
25829 | 4760 @end defopt |
4761 | |
4762 @defopt reftex-cite-view-format | |
4763 Citation format used to display citation info in the message area. See | |
4764 the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible percent | |
59536 | 4765 escapes. |
25829 | 4766 @end defopt |
4767 | |
4768 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-echo | |
4769 Non-@code{nil} means, automatic citation display will revisit files if | |
4770 necessary. When nil, citation display in echo area will only be active | |
4771 for cached echo strings (see @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}), or for | |
4772 BibTeX database files which are already visited by a live associated | |
59536 | 4773 buffers. |
25829 | 4774 @end defopt |
4775 | |
4776 @defopt reftex-cache-cite-echo | |
4777 Non-@code{nil} means, the information displayed in the echo area for | |
4778 cite macros (see variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}) is cached and | |
4779 saved along with the parsing information. The cache survives document | |
4780 scans. In order to clear it, use @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode}. | |
4781 @end defopt | |
4782 | |
4783 @node Options (Finding Files), Options (Optimizations), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options | |
4784 @section Finding Files | |
4785 @cindex Options, Finding Files | |
4786 @cindex Finding files, options | |
4787 | |
4788 @defopt reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
4789 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for TeX files. | |
59536 | 4790 Several entries are possible. |
25829 | 4791 @itemize @minus |
4792 @item | |
4793 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
59536 | 4794 used. |
25829 | 4795 @item |
4796 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4797 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4798 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.tex"}}. | |
4799 @item | |
4800 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4801 @end itemize | |
4802 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4803 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4804 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4805 @end defopt | |
4806 | |
4807 @defopt reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
4808 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for BibTeX | |
59536 | 4809 files. Several entries are possible. |
25829 | 4810 @itemize @minus |
4811 @item | |
4812 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
59536 | 4813 used. |
25829 | 4814 @item |
4815 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4816 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4817 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.bib"}}. | |
4818 @item | |
4819 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4820 @end itemize | |
4821 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4822 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4823 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4824 @end defopt | |
4825 | |
4826 @defopt reftex-file-extensions | |
4827 Association list with file extensions for different file types. | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4828 This is a list of items, each item is like: |
25829 | 4829 @code{(@var{type} . (@var{def-ext} @var{other-ext} ...))} |
4830 @example | |
4831 @var{type}: @r{File type like @code{"bib"} or @code{"tex"}.} | |
4832 @var{def-ext}: @r{The default extension for that file type, like @code{".tex"} or @code{".bib"}.} | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4833 @var{other-ext}: @r{Any number of other valid extensions for this file type.} |
25829 | 4834 @end example |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
4835 When a files is searched and it does not have any of the valid extensions, |
59536 | 4836 we try the default extension first, and then the naked file name. |
25829 | 4837 @end defopt |
4838 | |
4839 @defopt reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first | |
4840 Non-@code{nil} means, search all specified directories before trying | |
4841 recursion. Thus, in a path @samp{.//:/tex/}, search first @samp{./}, | |
4842 then @samp{/tex/}, and then all subdirectories of @samp{./}. If this | |
4843 option is @code{nil}, the subdirectories of @samp{./} are searched | |
4844 before @samp{/tex/}. This is mainly for speed - most of the time the | |
4845 recursive path is for the system files and not for the user files. Set | |
4846 this to @code{nil} if the default makes @b{Ref@TeX{}} finding files with | |
59536 | 4847 equal names in wrong sequence. |
25829 | 4848 @end defopt |
4849 | |
4850 @defopt reftex-use-external-file-finders | |
4851 Non-@code{nil} means, use external programs to find files. Normally, | |
4852 @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches the paths given in the environment variables | |
4853 @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS} to find TeX files and BibTeX | |
4854 database files. With this option turned on, it calls an external | |
4855 program specified in the option @code{reftex-external-file-finders} | |
4856 instead. As a side effect, the variables | |
4857 @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables} and | |
4858 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables} will be ignored. | |
4859 @end defopt | |
4860 | |
4861 @defopt reftex-external-file-finders | |
4862 Association list with external programs to call for finding files. Each | |
4863 entry is a cons cell @w{@code{(@var{type} . @var{program})}}. | |
4864 @var{type} is either @code{"tex"} or @code{"bib"}. @var{program} is a | |
4865 string containing the external program to use with any arguments. | |
4866 @code{%f} will be replaced by the name of the file to be found. Note | |
4867 that these commands will be executed directly, not via a shell. Only | |
4868 relevant when @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders} is | |
59536 | 4869 non-@code{nil}. |
25829 | 4870 @end defopt |
4871 | |
4872 @page | |
4873 @node Options (Optimizations), Options (Fontification), Options (Finding Files), Options | |
4874 @section Optimizations | |
4875 @cindex Options, optimizations | |
4876 @cindex Optimizations, options | |
4877 | |
4878 @defopt reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
4879 Non-@code{nil} means, keep buffers created for parsing and lookup. | |
4880 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sometimes needs to visit files related to the current | |
59536 | 4881 document. We distinguish files visited for |
25829 | 4882 @table @asis |
4883 @item PARSING | |
4884 Parts of a multifile document loaded when (re)-parsing the | |
59536 | 4885 document. |
25829 | 4886 @item LOOKUP |
4887 BibTeX database files and TeX files loaded to find a reference, to | |
59536 | 4888 display label context, etc. |
25829 | 4889 @end table |
4890 The created buffers can be kept for later use, or be thrown away | |
59536 | 4891 immediately after use, depending on the value of this variable: |
25829 | 4892 |
4893 @table @code | |
4894 @item nil | |
4895 Throw away as much as possible. | |
4896 @item t | |
4897 Keep everything. | |
4898 @item 1 | |
4899 Throw away buffers created for parsing, but keep the ones created for | |
59536 | 4900 lookup. |
25829 | 4901 @end table |
4902 | |
4903 If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is | |
4904 potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown | |
4905 away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | |
59536 | 4906 @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}. |
25829 | 4907 @end defopt |
4908 | |
4909 @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
4910 Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file | |
4911 temporarily. When @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may turn off find-file hooks and | |
4912 other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default | |
4913 initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of | |
4914 @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook | |
59536 | 4915 functions to do a minimal initialization. |
25829 | 4916 @end defopt |
4917 | |
4918 @defopt reftex-no-include-regexps | |
4919 List of regular expressions to exclude certain input files from parsing. | |
4920 If the name of a file included via @code{\include} or @code{\input} is | |
4921 matched by any of the regular expressions in this list, that file is not | |
4922 parsed by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
4923 @end defopt | |
4924 | |
4925 @defopt reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
4926 Non-@code{nil} means, re-parse only 1 file when asked to re-parse. | |
4927 Re-parsing is normally requested with a @kbd{C-u} prefix to many @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4928 commands, or with the @kbd{r} key in menus. When this option is | |
4929 @code{t} in a multifile document, we will only parse the current buffer, | |
4930 or the file associated with the label or section heading near point in a | |
4931 menu. Requesting re-parsing of an entire multifile document then | |
4932 requires a @kbd{C-u C-u} prefix or the capital @kbd{R} key in | |
59536 | 4933 menus. |
25829 | 4934 @end defopt |
4935 | |
4936 @defopt reftex-save-parse-info | |
4937 Non-@code{nil} means, save information gathered with parsing in files. | |
4938 The file @file{MASTER.rel} in the same directory as @file{MASTER.tex} is | |
4939 used to save the information. When this variable is @code{t}, | |
4940 @itemize @minus | |
4941 @item | |
4942 accessing the parsing information for the first time in an editing | |
4943 session will read that file (if available) instead of parsing the | |
59536 | 4944 document. |
25829 | 4945 @item |
4946 exiting Emacs or killing a buffer in reftex-mode will cause a new | |
59536 | 4947 version of the file to be written. |
25829 | 4948 @end itemize |
4949 @end defopt | |
4950 | |
27195 | 4951 @defopt reftex-parse-file-extension |
4952 File extension for the file in which parser information is stored. | |
4953 This extension is added to the base name of the master file. | |
4954 @end defopt | |
4955 | |
25829 | 4956 @defopt reftex-allow-automatic-rescan |
4957 Non-@code{nil} means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may rescan the document when this seems | |
4958 necessary. Applies (currently) only in rare cases, when a new label | |
4959 cannot be placed with certainty into the internal label list. | |
4960 @end defopt | |
4961 | |
4962 @defopt reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
4963 Non-@code{nil} means use a separate selection buffer for each label | |
4964 type. These buffers are kept from one selection to the next and need | |
4965 not to be created for each use - so the menu generally comes up faster. | |
4966 The selection buffers will be erased (and therefore updated) | |
4967 automatically when new labels in its category are added. See the | |
59536 | 4968 variable @code{reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers}. |
25829 | 4969 @end defopt |
4970 | |
4971 @defopt reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
4972 Non-@code{nil} means, selection buffers will be updated automatically. | |
4973 When a new label is defined with @code{reftex-label}, all selection | |
4974 buffers associated with that label category are emptied, in order to | |
4975 force an update upon next use. When @code{nil}, the buffers are left | |
4976 alone and have to be updated by hand, with the @kbd{g} key from the | |
4977 label selection process. The value of this variable will only have any | |
4978 effect when @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers} is | |
59536 | 4979 non-@code{nil}. |
25829 | 4980 @end defopt |
4981 | |
4982 @node Options (Fontification), Options (Misc), Options (Optimizations), Options | |
4983 @section Fontification | |
4984 @cindex Options, fontification | |
4985 @cindex Fontification, options | |
4986 | |
4987 @defopt reftex-use-fonts | |
4988 Non-@code{nil} means, use fonts in label menu and on-the-fly help. | |
4989 Font-lock must be loaded as well to actually get fontified | |
4990 display. After changing this option, a rescan may be necessary to | |
59536 | 4991 activate it. |
25829 | 4992 @end defopt |
4993 | |
4994 @defopt reftex-refontify-context | |
4995 Non-@code{nil} means, re-fontify the context in the label menu with | |
4996 font-lock. This slightly slows down the creation of the label menu. It | |
59536 | 4997 is only necessary when you definitely want the context fontified. |
25829 | 4998 |
4999 This option may have 3 different values: | |
5000 @table @code | |
5001 @item nil | |
5002 Never refontify. | |
5003 @item t | |
5004 Always refontify. | |
5005 @item 1 | |
5006 Refontify when necessary, e.g. with old versions of the x-symbol | |
59536 | 5007 package. |
25829 | 5008 @end table |
59536 | 5009 The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}. |
25829 | 5010 @end defopt |
5011 | |
5012 @defopt reftex-highlight-selection | |
5013 Non-@code{nil} means, highlight selected text in selection and | |
5014 @file{*toc*} buffers. Normally, the text near the cursor is the | |
5015 @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most | |
5016 keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you | |
5017 mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have | |
5018 mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The | |
59536 | 5019 variable may have one of these values: |
25829 | 5020 |
5021 @example | |
5022 nil @r{No highlighting.} | |
5023 cursor @r{Highlighting is cursor driven.} | |
5024 mouse @r{Highlighting is mouse driven.} | |
5025 both @r{Both cursor and mouse trigger highlighting.} | |
5026 @end example | |
5027 | |
5028 Changing this variable requires to rebuild the selection and *toc* | |
59536 | 5029 buffers to become effective (keys @kbd{g} or @kbd{r}). |
25829 | 5030 @end defopt |
5031 | |
5032 @defopt reftex-cursor-selected-face | |
5033 Face name to highlight cursor selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
59536 | 5034 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. |
25829 | 5035 @end defopt |
5036 @defopt reftex-mouse-selected-face | |
5037 Face name to highlight mouse selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
59536 | 5038 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. |
25829 | 5039 @end defopt |
5040 @defopt reftex-file-boundary-face | |
5041 Face name for file boundaries in selection buffer. | |
5042 @end defopt | |
5043 @defopt reftex-label-face | |
5044 Face name for labels in selection buffer. | |
5045 @end defopt | |
5046 @defopt reftex-section-heading-face | |
5047 Face name for section headings in toc and selection buffers. | |
5048 @end defopt | |
5049 @defopt reftex-toc-header-face | |
5050 Face name for the header of a toc buffer. | |
5051 @end defopt | |
5052 @defopt reftex-bib-author-face | |
5053 Face name for author names in bib selection buffer. | |
5054 @end defopt | |
5055 @defopt reftex-bib-year-face | |
5056 Face name for year in bib selection buffer. | |
5057 @end defopt | |
5058 @defopt reftex-bib-title-face | |
5059 Face name for article title in bib selection buffer. | |
5060 @end defopt | |
5061 @defopt reftex-bib-extra-face | |
5062 Face name for bibliographic information in bib selection buffer. | |
5063 @end defopt | |
5064 @defopt reftex-select-mark-face | |
5065 Face name for marked entries in the selection buffers. | |
5066 @end defopt | |
5067 @defopt reftex-index-header-face | |
5068 Face name for the header of an index buffer. | |
5069 @end defopt | |
5070 @defopt reftex-index-section-face | |
5071 Face name for the start of a new letter section in the index. | |
5072 @end defopt | |
5073 @defopt reftex-index-tag-face | |
5074 Face name for index names (for multiple indices). | |
5075 @end defopt | |
5076 @defopt reftex-index-face | |
5077 Face name for index entries. | |
5078 @end defopt | |
5079 | |
5080 @node Options (Misc), , Options (Fontification), Options | |
5081 @section Miscellaneous | |
5082 @cindex Options, misc | |
5083 | |
5084 @defopt reftex-extra-bindings | |
5085 Non-@code{nil} means, make additional key bindings on startup. These | |
5086 extra bindings are located in the users @samp{C-c letter} | |
59536 | 5087 map. @xref{Key Bindings}. |
25829 | 5088 @end defopt |
5089 | |
5090 @defopt reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX | |
5091 Plug-in flags for AUCTeX interface. This variable is a list of | |
5092 5 boolean flags. When a flag is non-@code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
59536 | 5093 will |
25829 | 5094 |
5095 @example | |
5096 - supply labels in new sections and environments (flag 1) | |
5097 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\label} (flag 2) | |
5098 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\ref} (flag 3) | |
5099 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\cite} (flag 4) | |
5100 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\index} (flag 5) | |
5101 @end example | |
5102 | |
5103 You may also set the variable itself to t or nil in order to turn all | |
5104 options on or off, respectively.@* | |
5105 Supplying labels in new sections and environments applies when creating | |
5106 sections with @kbd{C-c C-s} and environments with @kbd{C-c C-e}.@* | |
5107 Supplying macro arguments applies when you insert such a macro | |
5108 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}.@* | |
5109 See the AUCTeX documentation for more information. | |
5110 @end defopt | |
5111 | |
5112 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
5113 Non-@code{nil} means, follow-mode will revisit files if necessary. | |
5114 When nil, follow-mode will be suspended for stuff in unvisited files. | |
5115 @end defopt | |
5116 | |
5117 @defopt reftex-allow-detached-macro-args | |
5118 Non-@code{nil} means, allow arguments of macros to be detached by | |
5119 whitespace. When this is @code{t}, the @samp{aaa} in @w{@samp{\bbb | |
5120 [xxx] @{aaa@}}} will be considered an argument of @code{\bb}. Note that | |
5121 this will be the case even if @code{\bb} is defined with zero or one | |
59536 | 5122 argument. |
25829 | 5123 @end defopt |
5124 | |
5125 @node Keymaps and Hooks, Changes, Options, Top | |
5126 @section Keymaps and Hooks | |
5127 @cindex Keymaps | |
5128 | |
5129 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has the usual general keymap and load-- and mode-hook. | |
5130 | |
5131 @deffn Keymap reftex-mode-map | |
5132 The keymap for @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. | |
5133 @end deffn | |
5134 | |
5135 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-load-hook | |
5136 Normal hook which is being run when loading @file{reftex.el}. | |
5137 @end deffn | |
5138 | |
5139 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-mode-hook | |
59536 | 5140 Normal hook which is being run when turning on @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. |
25829 | 5141 @end deffn |
5142 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5143 Furthermore, the 4 modes used for referencing labels, creating |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5144 citations, the table of contents buffer and the phrases buffer have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5145 their own keymaps and mode hooks. See the respective sections. There |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5146 are many more hooks which are described in the relevant sections about |
59536 | 5147 options for a specific part of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. |
25829 | 5148 |
5149 @node Changes, , Keymaps and Hooks, Top | |
5150 @chapter Changes | |
5151 @cindex Changes | |
5152 | |
5153 Here is a list of recent changes to @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
5154 | |
59536 | 5155 @noindent @b{Version 4.26} |
25829 | 5156 @itemize @bullet |
5157 @item | |
59536 | 5158 Bug fixes only. |
25829 | 5159 @end itemize |
5160 | |
59536 | 5161 @noindent @b{Version 4.25} |
25829 | 5162 @itemize @bullet |
5163 @item | |
59536 | 5164 Fixed bug with @samp{%F} in a label prefix. Added new escapes |
5165 @samp{%m} and @samp{%M} for mater file name and master directory. | |
25829 | 5166 @end itemize |
5167 | |
59536 | 5168 @noindent @b{Version 4.24} |
25829 | 5169 @itemize @bullet |
59536 | 5170 @item |
5171 Inserting citation commands now prompts for optional arguments | |
5172 when called with a prefix argument. Related new options are | |
5173 @code{reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args} and | |
5174 @code{reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args}. | |
5175 @item | |
5176 New option @code{reftex-trust-label-prefix}. Configure this variable | |
5177 if you'd like RefTeX to base its classification of labels on prefixes. | |
5178 This can speed-up document parsing, but may in some cases reduce the | |
5179 quality of the context used by RefTeX to describe a label. | |
5180 @item | |
5181 Fixed bug in @code{reftex-create-bibtex-file} when @code{reftex-comment-citations} | |
5182 is non-nil. | |
5183 @item | |
5184 Fixed bugs in indexing: Case-sensitive search, quotes before and/or | |
5185 after words. Disabbled indexing in comment lines. | |
25829 | 5186 @end itemize |
5187 | |
59536 | 5188 @noindent @b{Version 4.22} |
25829 | 5189 @itemize @bullet |
59536 | 5190 @item |
5191 New command @code{reftex-create-bibtex-file} to create a new database | |
5192 with all entries referenced in the current document. | |
5193 @item | |
5194 New keys @kbd{e} and @kbd{E} allow to produce a BibTeX database file | |
5195 from entries marked in a citation selection buffer. | |
5196 @end itemize | |
5197 | |
5198 @noindent @b{Version 4.21} | |
5199 @itemize @bullet | |
5200 @item | |
5201 Renaming labels from the toc buffer with key @kbd{M-%}. | |
25829 | 5202 @end itemize |
5203 | |
59536 | 5204 @noindent @b{Version 4.20} |
25829 | 5205 @itemize @bullet |
5206 @item | |
59536 | 5207 Structure editing capabilities. The command keys @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} in |
5208 the TOC buffer promote/demote the section at point or all sections in | |
5209 the current region. | |
5210 @item | |
5211 New option @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-fraction} to set the size of | |
5212 the window used by the TOC. This makes the old variable | |
5213 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction} obsolete. | |
5214 @item | |
5215 A dedicated frame can show the TOC with the current section | |
5216 always automatically highlighted. The frame is created and | |
5217 deleted from the toc buffer with the @kbd{d} key. | |
25829 | 5218 @end itemize |
5219 | |
59536 | 5220 @noindent @b{Version 4.19} |
25829 | 5221 @itemize @bullet |
5222 @item | |
59536 | 5223 New command `reftex-toc-recenter' (@kbd{C-c -}) which shows the current |
5224 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window. | |
5225 @item | |
5226 Recentering happens automatically in idle time when the option | |
5227 @code{reftex-auto-recenter-toc} is turned on. | |
5228 @item | |
5229 Fixed several bugs related to automatic cursor positioning in the TOC | |
5230 buffer. | |
5231 @item | |
5232 The highlight in the TOC buffer stays when the focus moves to a | |
5233 different window. | |
5234 @item | |
5235 New command `reftex-goto-label'. | |
5236 @item | |
5237 Part numbers are no longer included in chapter numbers, and a new | |
5238 part does not reset the chapter counter. See new option | |
5239 @code{reftex-part-resets-chapter}. | |
5240 @end itemize | |
5241 | |
5242 @noindent @b{Version 4.18} | |
5243 @itemize @bullet | |
5244 @item | |
5245 @code{reftex-citation} uses the word before the cursor as a default | |
5246 search string. | |
5247 @item | |
5248 Simplified several regular expressions for speed. | |
5249 @item | |
5250 Better support for chapterbib. | |
25829 | 5251 @end itemize |
5252 | |
59536 | 5253 @noindent @b{Version 4.17} |
25829 | 5254 @itemize @bullet |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5255 @item |
59536 | 5256 The toc window can be split off horizontally. See new options |
5257 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally}, | |
5258 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction}. | |
5259 @item | |
5260 It is possible to specify a function which verifies an index match | |
5261 during global indexing. See new option @code{reftex-index-verify-function}. | |
5262 @item | |
5263 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can | |
5264 be configured. See new option @code{reftex-include-file-commands}. | |
5265 @item | |
5266 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography) can | |
5267 be configured. See new option @code{reftex-bibliography-commands}. | |
5268 @item | |
5269 The regular expression used to search for the \bibliography macro has | |
5270 been relaxed to allow for @samp{@{\bibliography@{...@}@}} needed by | |
5271 chapterbib. | |
5272 @item | |
5273 Small bug fixes. | |
25829 | 5274 @end itemize |
5275 | |
59536 | 5276 @noindent @b{Version 4.15} |
25829 | 5277 @itemize @bullet |
5278 @item | |
59536 | 5279 Fixed bug with parsing of BibTeX files, when fields contain quotes or |
5280 unmatched parenthesis. | |
5281 @item | |
5282 Small bug fixes. | |
5283 @item | |
5284 Improved interaction with Emacs LaTeX mode. | |
25829 | 5285 @end itemize |
5286 | |
59536 | 5287 @noindent @b{Version 4.12} |
25829 | 5288 @itemize @bullet |
5289 @item | |
59536 | 5290 Support for @file{bibentry} citation style. |
25829 | 5291 @end itemize |
5292 | |
59536 | 5293 @noindent @b{Version 4.11} |
5294 @itemize @bullet | |
5295 @item | |
5296 Fixed bug which would parse @samp{\Section} just like @samp{\section}. | |
5297 @end itemize | |
5298 | |
5299 @noindent @b{Version 4.10} | |
25829 | 5300 @itemize @bullet |
5301 @item | |
59536 | 5302 Renamed @file{reftex-vcr.el} to @file{reftex-dcr.el} because of conflict |
5303 with @file{reftex-vars.el} on DOS machines. | |
5304 @item | |
5305 New options @code{reftex-parse-file-extension} and | |
5306 @code{reftex-index-phrase-file-extension}. | |
25829 | 5307 @end itemize |
5308 | |
59536 | 5309 @noindent [.....] |
5310 @ignore | |
5311 @noindent @b{Version 4.09} | |
25829 | 5312 @itemize @bullet |
5313 @item | |
59536 | 5314 New option @code{reftex-toc-max-level} to limit the depth of the toc. |
5315 New key binding @kbd{t} in the @file{*toc*} buffer to change this | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5316 setting. |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5317 @item |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5318 RefTeX maintains an @file{Index Phrases} file in which phrases can be |
59536 | 5319 collected. When the document is ready, RefTeX can search all |
5320 these phrases and assist indexing all matches. | |
5321 @item | |
5322 The variables @code{reftex-index-macros} and | |
5323 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} have changed their syntax slightly. | |
5324 The @var{repeat} parameter has move from the latter to the former. | |
5325 Also calls to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} from AUCTeX style files | |
5326 need to be adapted. | |
5327 @item | |
5328 The variable @code{reftex-section-levels} no longer contains the | |
5329 default stuff which has been moved to a constant. | |
5330 @item | |
5331 Environments like theorems can be placed into the TOC by putting | |
5332 entries for @samp{"begin@{theorem@}"} in | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5333 @code{reftex-setion-levels}. |
59536 | 5334 @end itemize |
5335 | |
5336 @noindent @b{Version 4.06} | |
5337 @itemize @bullet | |
5338 @item | |
5339 @code{reftex-section-levels} can contain a function to compute the level | |
5340 of a sectioning command. | |
5341 @item | |
5342 Multiple @code{thebibliography} environments recognized. | |
5343 @end itemize | |
5344 | |
5345 @noindent @b{Version 4.04} | |
5346 @itemize @bullet | |
5347 @item | |
5348 New option @code{reftex-index-default-tag} implements a default for queries. | |
25829 | 5349 @end itemize |
5350 | |
59536 | 5351 @noindent @b{Version 4.02} |
25829 | 5352 @itemize @bullet |
5353 @item | |
59536 | 5354 macros ending in @samp{refrange} are considered to contain references. |
5355 @item | |
5356 Index entries made with @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} in TeX | |
5357 math mode automatically get enclosing @samp{$} to preserve math mode. See | |
5358 new option @code{reftex-index-math-format}. Requires AUCTeX. | |
25829 | 5359 @end itemize |
5360 | |
59536 | 5361 @noindent @b{Version 4.01} |
25829 | 5362 @itemize @bullet |
5363 @item | |
59536 | 5364 New command @code{reftex-index-globally} to index a word in many |
5365 places in the document. Also available from the index buffer with | |
5366 @kbd{&}. | |
5367 @item | |
5368 The first item in a @code{reftex-label-alist} entry may now also be a parser | |
5369 function to do non-standard parsing. | |
5370 @item | |
5371 @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref} no longer interferes with | |
5372 @code{pop-up-frames} (patch from Stefan Monnier). | |
25829 | 5373 @end itemize |
5374 | |
59536 | 5375 @noindent @b{Version 4.00} |
25829 | 5376 @itemize @bullet |
5377 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5378 RefTeX has been split into several smaller files which are autoloaded on |
59536 | 5379 demand. |
5380 @item | |
5381 Index support, along with many new options. | |
5382 @item | |
5383 The selection of keys for @code{\ref} and @code{\cite} now allows to | |
5384 select multiple items by marking entries with the @kbd{m} key. | |
5385 @item | |
5386 Fancyref support. | |
25829 | 5387 @end itemize |
5388 | |
59536 | 5389 @noindent @b{Version 3.43} |
25829 | 5390 @itemize @bullet |
5391 @item | |
59536 | 5392 Viewing cross-references generalized. Now works on @code{\label}, |
5393 @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index}, variations of | |
5394 these, and from BibTeX buffers. | |
5395 @item | |
5396 New option @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}. | |
5397 @item | |
5398 Support for the additional sectioning commands @code{\addchap} and | |
5399 @code{\addsec} which are defined in the LaTeX KOMA-Script classes. | |
5400 @item | |
5401 Files in @code{reftex-default-bibliography} will be searched along | |
5402 @code{BIBINPUTS} path. | |
5403 @item | |
5404 Reading a parse file now checks consistency. | |
25829 | 5405 @end itemize |
5406 | |
59536 | 5407 @noindent @b{Version 3.42} |
25829 | 5408 @itemize @bullet |
5409 @item | |
59536 | 5410 File search further refined. New option @code{reftex-file-extensions}. |
5411 @item | |
5412 @file{*toc*} buffer can show the file boundaries of a multifile | |
5413 document, all labels and associated context. New keys @kbd{i}, @kbd{l}, | |
5414 and @kbd{c}. New options @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}, | |
5415 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}, | |
5416 @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. | |
25829 | 5417 @end itemize |
5418 | |
59536 | 5419 @noindent @b{Version 3.41} |
25829 | 5420 @itemize @bullet |
5421 @item | |
59536 | 5422 New options @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables}, |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5423 @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}, |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5424 @code{reftex-external-file-finders}, |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5425 @code{reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first}. |
59536 | 5426 @item |
5427 @emph{kpathsearch} support. See new options and | |
5428 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables}. | |
5429 @end itemize | |
5430 | |
5431 @noindent @b{Version 3.38} | |
5432 @itemize @bullet | |
5433 @item | |
5434 @code{reftex-view-crossref} no longer moves to find a macro. Point has | |
5435 to be on the macro argument. | |
5436 @end itemize | |
5437 | |
5438 @noindent @b{Version 3.36} | |
5439 @itemize @bullet | |
5440 @item | |
5441 New value @code{window} for option @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
25829 | 5442 @end itemize |
5443 | |
59536 | 5444 @noindent @b{Version 3.35} |
5445 @itemize @bullet | |
5446 @item | |
5447 ISO 8859 Latin-1 chars are converted to ASCII to derive better labels. | |
5448 This takes back the related changes in 3.34 for safety reasons. | |
5449 @end itemize | |
5450 | |
5451 @noindent @b{Version 3.34} | |
25829 | 5452 @itemize @bullet |
5453 @item | |
59536 | 5454 Additional flag in @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} do make only |
5455 lowercase labels (default @code{t}). | |
5456 @item | |
5457 All @file{.rel} files have a final newline to avoid queries. | |
5458 @item | |
5459 Single byte representations of accented European letters (ISO-8859-1) | |
60927
bae786986f2e
* calc.texi, cl.texi, gnus.texi, idlwave.texi, reftex.texi: Replace
Werner LEMBERG <wl@gnu.org>
parents:
60919
diff
changeset
|
5460 are now valid in labels. |
25829 | 5461 @end itemize |
5462 | |
59536 | 5463 @noindent @b{Version 3.33} |
25829 | 5464 @itemize @bullet |
5465 @item | |
59536 | 5466 Multiple selection buffers are now hidden buffers (they start with a |
5467 SPACE). | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5468 @item |
59536 | 5469 Fixed bug with file search when TEXINPUTS environment variable is empty. |
25829 | 5470 @end itemize |
5471 | |
59536 | 5472 @noindent @b{Version 3.30} |
5473 @itemize @bullet | |
5474 @item | |
5475 In @code{reftex-citation}, the regular expression used to scan BibTeX | |
5476 files can be specified using completion on known citation keys. | |
5477 @item | |
5478 New keys @kbd{a} and @kbd{A} in BibTeX selection process to cite @emph{all} | |
5479 entries. | |
5480 @item | |
5481 New command @code{reftex-renumber-simple-labels} to renumber simple | |
5482 labels like @samp{eq:13} sequentially through a document. | |
5483 @end itemize | |
5484 | |
5485 @noindent @b{Version 3.28} | |
25829 | 5486 @itemize @bullet |
5487 @item | |
59536 | 5488 Auto view crossref for XEmacs uses @code{post-command-hook} to restart the |
5489 timer, since itimer restart is not reliable. | |
5490 @item | |
5491 Option @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} renamed to @code{-regexps}. | |
5492 @item | |
5493 Expansion of recursive tex and bib path rewritten. | |
5494 @item | |
5495 Fixed problem where @b{Ref@TeX{}} did not scan unsaved buffers. | |
5496 @item | |
5497 Fixed bug with section numbering after *-red sections. | |
25829 | 5498 @end itemize |
5499 | |
59536 | 5500 @noindent @b{Version 3.27} |
5501 @itemize @bullet | |
5502 @item | |
5503 Macros can define @emph{neutral} labels, just like @code{\label} | |
5504 itself. | |
5505 @item | |
5506 New option @code{reftex-allow-detached-macro-args}, default @code{nil}! | |
5507 @end itemize | |
5508 | |
5509 @noindent @b{Version 3.26} | |
25829 | 5510 @itemize @bullet |
5511 @item | |
59536 | 5512 [X]Emacs 19 no longer supported. Use 3.22 for Emacs 19. |
5513 @item | |
5514 New hooks @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
5515 @code{reftex-string-to-label-function}. | |
5516 @item | |
5517 Made sure automatic crossref display will not visit/scan files. | |
25829 | 5518 @end itemize |
5519 | |
59536 | 5520 @noindent @b{Version 3.25} |
25829 | 5521 @itemize @bullet |
5522 @item | |
59536 | 5523 Echoing of citation info caches the info for displayed entries. |
5524 New option @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}. | |
5525 @item | |
5526 @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode} now also removes the file with parsing | |
5527 info. | |
5528 @item | |
5529 Default of @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow} changed to nil. | |
5530 @end itemize | |
5531 | |
5532 @noindent @b{Version 3.24} | |
5533 @itemize @bullet | |
5534 @item | |
5535 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-echo}. | |
5536 @item | |
5537 Interface with X-Symbol (>=2.6) is now complete and stable. | |
5538 @item | |
5539 Adapted to new outline, which uses overlays. | |
5540 @item | |
5541 File names in @code{\bibliography} may now have the @code{.bib} | |
5542 extension. | |
5543 @item | |
5544 Fixed Bug with parsing "single file" from master file buffer. | |
25829 | 5545 @end itemize |
5546 | |
5547 @noindent @b{Version 3.23} | |
5548 @itemize @bullet | |
5549 @item | |
5550 Parse files @file{MASTER.rel} made compatible between Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5551 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5552 @code{kill-emacs-hook} and @code{kill-buffer-hook} now write the parse |
25829 | 5553 file. |
5554 @item | |
5555 The cursor inside a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro can now trigger | |
5556 automatic display of crossref information in the echo area. See | |
5557 variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
5558 @item | |
5559 AUCTeX interface updates: | |
5560 @itemize @minus | |
5561 @item | |
5562 AUCTeX 9.9c and later notifies @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections. | |
5563 @item | |
5564 @b{Ref@TeX{}} notifies AUCTeX about new labels. | |
5565 @item | |
5566 @code{TeX-arg-ref} no longer used (introduction was unnecessary). | |
5567 @item | |
5568 @code{reftex-arg-label} and @code{reftex-arg-cite} fixed up. | |
5569 @item | |
5570 Settings added to @b{Ref@TeX{}} via style files remain local. | |
5571 @end itemize | |
5572 @item | |
5573 Fixed bug with @code{reftex-citation} in non-latex buffers. | |
5574 @item | |
5575 Fixed bug with syntax table and context refontification. | |
5576 @item | |
5577 Safety-net for name change of @code{font-lock-reference-face}. | |
5578 @end itemize | |
5579 | |
59536 | 5580 @noindent @b{Version 3.22} |
25829 | 5581 @itemize @bullet |
5582 @item | |
59536 | 5583 Fixed bug with empty context strings. |
5584 @item | |
5585 @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} is now bound by default at | |
5586 @kbd{S-mouse-2}. | |
25829 | 5587 @end itemize |
5588 | |
59536 | 5589 @noindent @b{Version 3.21} |
25829 | 5590 @itemize @bullet |
5591 @item | |
59536 | 5592 New options for all faces used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. They're in the |
5593 customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}. | |
25829 | 5594 @end itemize |
5595 | |
59536 | 5596 @noindent @b{Version 3.19} |
5597 @itemize @bullet | |
5598 @item | |
5599 Fixed bug with AUCTeX @code{TeX-master}. | |
5600 @end itemize | |
5601 | |
5602 @noindent @b{Version 3.18} | |
25829 | 5603 @itemize @bullet |
5604 @item | |
59536 | 5605 The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input. |
5606 This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g. you can now | |
5607 switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc. | |
5608 @item | |
5609 New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. | |
5610 @item | |
5611 @kbd{mouse-2} can be used to select in selection and @file{*toc*} | |
5612 buffers. | |
5613 @item | |
5614 Fixed some problems regarding the interaction with VIPER mode. | |
5615 @item | |
5616 Follow-mode is now only used after point motion. | |
5617 @item | |
5618 @b{Ref@TeX{}} now finally does not fontify temporary files anymore. | |
25829 | 5619 @end itemize |
5620 | |
59536 | 5621 @noindent @b{Version 3.17} |
25829 | 5622 @itemize @bullet |
5623 @item | |
59536 | 5624 Additional bindings in selection and @file{*toc*} buffers. @kbd{g} |
5625 redefined. | |
5626 @item | |
5627 New command @code{reftex-save-all-document-buffers}. | |
5628 @item | |
5629 Magic word matching made more intelligent. | |
5630 @item | |
5631 Selection process can switch to completion (with @key{TAB}). | |
5632 @item | |
5633 @code{\appendix} is now recognized and influences section numbering. | |
5634 @item | |
5635 File commentary shortened considerably (use Info documentation). | |
5636 @item | |
5637 New option @code{reftex-no-include-regexps} to skip some include files. | |
5638 @item | |
5639 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. | |
25829 | 5640 @end itemize |
5641 | |
59536 | 5642 @noindent @b{Version 3.16} |
25829 | 5643 @itemize @bullet |
5644 @item | |
59536 | 5645 New hooks @code{reftex-format-label-function}, |
5646 @code{reftex-format-ref-function}, @code{reftex-format-cite-function}. | |
5647 @item | |
5648 TeXInfo documentation completed. | |
5649 @item | |
5650 Some restrictions in Label inserting and referencing removed. | |
5651 @item | |
5652 New variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
25829 | 5653 @end itemize |
59536 | 5654 |
5655 @noindent @b{Version 3.14} | |
25829 | 5656 @itemize @bullet |
5657 @item | |
59536 | 5658 Selection buffers can be kept between selections: this is faster. |
5659 See new variable @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers}. | |
5660 @item | |
5661 Prefix interpretation of reftex-view-crossref changed. | |
5662 @item | |
5663 Support for the @code{varioref} package (@kbd{v} key in selection | |
5664 buffer). | |
25829 | 5665 @end itemize |
59536 | 5666 |
5667 @noindent @b{Version 3.12} | |
25829 | 5668 @itemize @bullet |
5669 @item | |
59536 | 5670 There are 3 new keymaps for customization: @code{reftex-toc-map}, |
5671 @code{reftex-select-label-map}, @code{reftex-select-bib-map}. | |
5672 @item | |
5673 Refontification uses more standard font-lock stuff. | |
5674 @item | |
5675 When no BibTeX database files are specified, citations can also use | |
5676 @code{\bibitem} entries from a @code{thebibliography} environment. | |
25829 | 5677 @end itemize |
59536 | 5678 |
5679 @noindent @b{Version 3.11} | |
25829 | 5680 @itemize @bullet |
5681 @item | |
59536 | 5682 Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.) footnotes. |
5683 @item | |
5684 Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select. | |
25829 | 5685 @end itemize |
59536 | 5686 |
5687 @noindent @b{Version 3.10} | |
25829 | 5688 @itemize @bullet |
5689 @item | |
59536 | 5690 Fixed a bug which made reftex 3.07 fail on [X]Emacs version 19. |
5691 @item | |
5692 Removed unimportant code which caused OS/2 Emacs to crash. | |
5693 @item | |
5694 All customization variables now accessible from menu. | |
25829 | 5695 @end itemize |
59536 | 5696 |
5697 @noindent @b{Version 3.07} | |
25829 | 5698 @itemize @bullet |
5699 @item | |
59536 | 5700 @code{Ref} menu improved. |
5701 @end itemize | |
5702 | |
5703 @noindent @b{Version 3.05} | |
5704 @itemize @bullet | |
5705 @item | |
5706 Compatibility code now first checks for XEmacs feature. | |
25829 | 5707 @end itemize |
59536 | 5708 |
5709 @noindent @b{Version 3.04} | |
5710 @itemize @bullet | |
5711 @item | |
5712 Fixed BUG in the @emph{xr} support. | |
5713 @end itemize | |
5714 | |
5715 @noindent @b{Version 3.03} | |
25829 | 5716 @itemize @bullet |
5717 @item | |
59536 | 5718 Support for the LaTeX package @code{xr}, for inter-document |
5719 references. | |
5720 @item | |
5721 A few (minor) Mule-related changes. | |
5722 @item | |
5723 Fixed bug which could cause @emph{huge} @file{.rel} files. | |
5724 @item | |
5725 Search for input and @file{.bib} files with recursive path definitions. | |
25829 | 5726 @end itemize |
59536 | 5727 |
5728 @noindent @b{Version 3.00} | |
25829 | 5729 @itemize @bullet |
5730 @item | |
59536 | 5731 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work better for very large projects: |
5732 @item | |
5733 The new parser works without creating a master buffer. | |
5734 @item | |
5735 Rescanning can be limited to a part of a multifile document. | |
5736 @item | |
5737 Information from the parser can be stored in a file. | |
5738 @item | |
5739 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can deal with macros having a naked label as an argument. | |
5740 @item | |
5741 Macros may have white space and newlines between arguments. | |
5742 @item | |
5743 Multiple identical section headings no longer confuse | |
5744 @code{reftex-toc}. | |
5745 @item | |
5746 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work correctly in combination with buffer-altering | |
5747 packages like outline, folding, x-symbol, iso-cvt, isotex, etc. | |
5748 @item | |
5749 All labeled environments discussed in @emph{The LaTeX Companion} by | |
5750 Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley 1994) are part of | |
5751 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s defaults. | |
25829 | 5752 @end itemize |
59536 | 5753 |
5754 @noindent @b{Version 2.17} | |
25829 | 5755 @itemize @bullet |
5756 @item | |
59536 | 5757 Label prefix expands % escapes with current file name and other stuff. |
5758 @item | |
5759 Citation format now with % escapes. This is not backward | |
5760 compatible! | |
5761 @item | |
5762 TEXINPUTS variable recognized when looking for input files. | |
5763 @item | |
5764 Context can be the nth argument of a macro. | |
5765 @item | |
5766 Searching in the select buffer is now possible (@kbd{C-s} and | |
5767 @kbd{C-r}). | |
5768 @item | |
5769 Display and derive-label can use two different context methods. | |
5770 @item | |
5771 AMSmath @code{xalignat} and @code{xxalignat} added. | |
25829 | 5772 @end itemize |
59536 | 5773 |
5774 @noindent @b{Version 2.14} | |
25829 | 5775 @itemize @bullet |
5776 @item | |
59536 | 5777 Variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} simplifies cooperation with |
5778 AUCTeX. | |
25829 | 5779 @end itemize |
59536 | 5780 |
5781 @noindent @b{Version 2.11} | |
5782 @itemize @bullet | |
5783 @item | |
5784 Submitted for inclusion to Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5785 @end itemize | |
5786 | |
5787 @noindent @b{Version 2.07} | |
25829 | 5788 @itemize @bullet |
5789 @item | |
59536 | 5790 New functions @code{reftex-search-document}, |
5791 @code{reftex-query-replace-document}. | |
25829 | 5792 @end itemize |
59536 | 5793 |
5794 @noindent @b{Version 2.05} | |
5795 @itemize @bullet | |
5796 @item | |
5797 Support for @file{custom.el}. | |
5798 @item | |
5799 New function @code{reftex-grep-document} (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
5800 @end itemize | |
5801 | |
5802 @noindent @b{Version 2.03} | |
25829 | 5803 @itemize @bullet |
5804 @item | |
59536 | 5805 @code{figure*}, @code{table*}, @code{sidewaysfigure/table} added to |
5806 default environments. | |
5807 @item | |
5808 @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} introduced (thanks to Rory Molinari). | |
5809 @item | |
5810 New functions @code{reftex-arg-label}, @code{reftex-arg-ref}, | |
5811 @code{reftex-arg-cite}. | |
5812 @item | |
5813 Emacs/XEmacs compatibility reworked. XEmacs 19.15 now is | |
5814 required. | |
5815 @item | |
5816 @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} (to be called from AUCTeX style | |
5817 files). | |
5818 @item | |
5819 Finding context with a hook function. | |
5820 @item | |
5821 Sorting BibTeX entries (new variable: | |
5822 @code{reftex-sort-bibtex-matches}). | |
25829 | 5823 @end itemize |
59536 | 5824 |
5825 @noindent @b{Version 2.00} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5826 @itemize @bullet |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5827 @item |
59536 | 5828 Labels can be derived from context (default for sections). |
5829 @item | |
5830 Configuration of label insertion and label referencing revised. | |
5831 @item | |
5832 Crossref fields in BibTeX database entries. | |
5833 @item | |
5834 @code{reftex-toc} introduced (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5835 @end itemize |
59536 | 5836 |
5837 @noindent @b{Version 1.09} | |
27195 | 5838 @itemize @bullet |
5839 @item | |
59536 | 5840 Support for @code{tex-main-file}, an analogue for |
5841 @code{TeX-master}. | |
5842 @item | |
5843 MS-DOS support. | |
27195 | 5844 @end itemize |
59536 | 5845 |
5846 @noindent @b{Version 1.07} | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5847 @itemize @bullet |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5848 @item |
59536 | 5849 @b{Ref@TeX{}} gets its own menu. |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5850 @end itemize |
59536 | 5851 |
5852 @noindent @b{Version 1.05} | |
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5853 @itemize @bullet |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5854 @item |
59536 | 5855 XEmacs port. |
5856 @end itemize | |
5857 | |
5858 @noindent @b{Version 1.04} | |
5859 @itemize @bullet | |
5860 @item | |
5861 Macros as wrappers, AMSTeX support, delayed context parsing for | |
5862 new labels. | |
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5863 @end itemize |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5864 @end ignore |
59536 | 5865 |
5866 @noindent @b{Version 1.00} | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5867 @itemize @bullet |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5868 @item |
59536 | 5869 released on 7 Jan 1997. |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5870 @end itemize |
59536 | 5871 |
5872 | |
5873 | |
5874 | |
25829 | 5875 |
5876 @node Index, , , Top | |
5877 @unnumbered Index | |
5878 @printindex cp | |
5879 | |
5880 @summarycontents | |
5881 @contents | |
5882 @bye | |
5883 | |
59548
83df5808ec6b
Changes from arch/CVS synchronization
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59538
diff
changeset
|
5884 @ignore |
83df5808ec6b
Changes from arch/CVS synchronization
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59538
diff
changeset
|
5885 arch-tag: 1e055774-0576-4b1b-b47f-550d0961fd43 |
83df5808ec6b
Changes from arch/CVS synchronization
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59538
diff
changeset
|
5886 @end ignore |